Samsung SC-DC165 Owner`s manual

ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
DVD 攝錄放影機
SC-DC163/DC164/DC165
SC-DC163/DC164/DC165
AF
CCD
LCD
AF
CCD
LCD
Auto Focus
Charge Coupled Device
Liquid Crystal Display
自動對焦
光電耦合元件
液晶顯示
Owner’s Instruction Book
Before operating the unit, please read this Instruction
Book thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.
使用說明書
使用本裝置之前,請先仔細閱讀本說明書並
妥善保存以備將來參考之用。
Use only approved battery packs.
Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating,
fire or explosion.
Samsung is not responsible for problems
occurring due to using unapproved batteries.
請僅使用認可的電池組。
否則,將會導致過熱、火災或爆炸的危險。
使用未經認可之配件所導致的問題不在
Samsung 保固範圍內。
DVD+ReWritable
DVD+R DL
AD68-00993G
ENGLISH
Contents
臺 灣
目錄
Notes and Safety Instructions ................................................................6
注意事項和安全說明.....................................................................................6
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder .................................................9
Features ......................................................................................................9
Usable Discs .............................................................................................10
Disc Type Description ................................................................................ 11
How to use the DVD Camcorder easily .....................................................12
Accessories Supplied with the DVD Camcorder .......................................13
Front & Left View .......................................................................................14
Left Side View............................................................................................15
Right & Top View .......................................................................................16
Rear & Bottom View .................................................................................17
Remote Control (SC-DC164/DC165 only) .................................................18
特性 ............................................................................................................. 9
可以播放的光碟 .........................................................................................10
光碟類型說明 ............................................................................................ 11
如何輕鬆容易地使用 DVD 攝錄放影機 .....................................................12
DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的配件 .....................................................................13
正視圖和左視圖 .........................................................................................14
左視圖 ....................................................................................................... 15
右視圖和頂視圖 .........................................................................................16
後視圖和底視圖 ........................................................................................17
遙控器(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165) ..........................................................18
Preparation .............................................................................................19
Using the Hand Strap & Lens Cover .........................................................19
Lithium Battery Installation ........................................................................20
Using the Lithium Ion Battery Pack ...........................................................21
Connecting a Power Source ......................................................................25
About the Operating Modes ......................................................................26
Using the Joystick .....................................................................................26
Using the QUICK MENU ...........................................................................27
OSD (On Screen Display) in Camera Mode/Player Mode ...........................28
OSD (On Screen Display) in M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode .............................29
Turning the OSD (On Screen Display) On/Off ..................................................29
使用手提帶和透鏡蓋 .................................................................................19
安裝鋰電池 ................................................................................................ 20
使用鋰離子電池組 .....................................................................................21
連接電源 .................................................................................................... 25
關於操作模式 ............................................................................................ 26
使用搖桿 .................................................................................................... 26
使用快速選單 ............................................................................................ 27
相機/播放機模式下的 OSD(螢幕顯示) .................................................28
在 M.Cam 模式/M.Player 模式下的 OSD(螢幕顯示) ...........................29
開啟/關閉 OSD(螢幕顯示) ....................................................................29
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting....................................................30
Setting the Clock (Clock Set) ....................................................................30
Setting the Wireless Remote Control Acceptance (Remote)
(SC-DC164/DC165 only) ...........................................................................31
Setting the Beep Sound (Beep Sound) .....................................................32
Setting the Shutter Sound (Shutter Sound) ...............................................33
Selecting the OSD Language (Language) ................................................34
Viewing the Demonstration (Demonstration) .............................................35
Initial Setting: Display Menu Setting....................................................36
Adjusting the LCD Screen (LCD Bright/LCD Color) ..................................36
Displaying the Date/Time (Date/Time).......................................................37
2
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機 ...........................................................................9
準備工作 .....................................................................................................19
起始設定:系統選單設定 ...........................................................................30
設定時鐘(Clock Set) .............................................................................30
設定無線遙控器接收(Remote)(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165) ................31
設定嗶聲(Beep Sound).........................................................................32
設定快門聲響(Shutter Sound) ..............................................................33
選擇 OSD 語言(Language)...................................................................34
觀賞示範畫面(Demonstration) ..............................................................35
起始設定:顯示選單設定 ...........................................................................36
調整 LCD 螢幕(LCD Bright/LCD Color) ................................................36
顯示日期/時間(Date/Time) ...................................................................37
ENGLISH
Contents
臺 灣
目錄
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording .....................................................38
Using the Viewfinder..................................................................................38
Various Recording Techniques ..................................................................39
Inserting and Removing a Disc .................................................................40
Selecting the Record Mode (Rec Mode) ...................................................42
使用觀景窗 ................................................................................................ 38
各種錄製技巧 ............................................................................................ 39
插入和取出光碟 .........................................................................................40
選擇錄製模式(Rec Mode) .....................................................................42
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording.......................................................43
Making your First Recording .....................................................................43
Recording with Ease for Beginners (EASY.Q Mode) .................................44
Using External Microphone .......................................................................45
Zooming In and Out ...................................................................................45
Using the Fade In and Out (FADE) ...........................................................46
Using Back Light Compensation Mode (BLC) ...........................................47
Using the Color Nite ..................................................................................48
Using the LED LIGHT (SC-DC165 only) ...................................................49
進行您的第一次錄製 .................................................................................43
初學者的輕鬆錄製方式(EASY.Q Mode) ...............................................44
外接式麥克風 ............................................................................................ 45
放大和縮小 ................................................................................................ 45
使用淡入和淡出(FADE) ........................................................................46
使用背光補償模式(BLC) .......................................................................47
使用 Color Nite(色彩夜拍) ....................................................................48
使用 LED 燈(僅限 SC-DC165) .............................................................49
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording ...............................................50
Cutting Off Wind Noise (Wind Cut) ............................................................50
Setting the Shutter Speed & Exposure (Shutter/Exposure) ......................51
Auto Focus / Manual Focus .......................................................................52
Programmed Automatic Exposure Modes (Program AE) ..........................53
Setting the White Balance (White Balance) ..............................................55
Applying Digital Effects (Digital Effect) ......................................................57
Setting the 16:9 Wide mode (16:9 Wide) ..................................................59
Setting the Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS) ..................................................60
Zooming In and Out with Digital Zoom (Digital Zoom) ..............................61
風聲消減(Wind Cut)..............................................................................50
設定快門速度和曝光(Shutter/Exposure) ..............................................51
自動對焦/手動對焦 ....................................................................................52
程序自動曝光模式(Program AE) ..........................................................53
設定白平衡(White Balance)..................................................................55
套用數位效果(Digital Effect) .................................................................57
設定 16:9 寬螢幕模式(16:9 Wide) ........................................................59
設定數位防手震功能(DIS) ....................................................................60
使用數位縮放來放大及縮小(Digital Zoom) ...........................................61
DVD Camcorder: Thumbnail index and Playlist ....................................62
What is the Thumbnail Index? ...................................................................62
What’s a Playlist? ......................................................................................62
DVD Camcorder .....................................................................................63
Playing Title Scenes ..................................................................................63
Adjusting the Volume .................................................................................63
Various Functions while in Player Mode ....................................................64
Zooming during Playback (PB ZOOM) ......................................................66
Deleting a Title Scene (Delete) .................................................................67
Deleting a Section of a Title Scene (Partial Delete) .................................68
DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前 ..........................................................................38
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製 ......................................................................43
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製 ......................................................................50
DVD 攝錄放影機:縮圖索引和播放清單 ....................................................62
什麼是縮圖索引? .....................................................................................62
什麼是播放清單? .....................................................................................62
DVD 攝錄放影機 .........................................................................................63
播放標題場景 ............................................................................................ 63
調整音量 .................................................................................................... 63
播放機模式下的各種功能 ..........................................................................64
播放時縮放(PB ZOOM) ........................................................................66
刪除標題(Delete) ..................................................................................67
刪除標題的一個部分(Partial Delete) ....................................................68
3
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Contents
目錄
DVD Camcorder: Playlist ......................................................................69
Creating a New Playlist (New Playlist) .....................................................69
Playing the Playlist ...................................................................................70
Deleting a Playlist (Delete) .......................................................................71
Adding Scenes to Playlist (Edit Playlist-Add) ...........................................72
Changing the Order of Scene Playing within a Playlist
(Edit Playlist-Move) ..................................................................................74
Deleting Scenes from Playlist (Edit Playlist-Delete) .................................76
Deleting a Section of a Playlist (Edit Playlist-Partial Delete) ....................77
建立新的播放清單(New Playlist) ..........................................................69
播放播放清單 ............................................................................................ 70
刪除播放清單(Delete) ...........................................................................71
將場景新增至播放清單(Edit Playlist-Add) ............................................72
變更播放清單內播放場景的順序(Edit Playlist-Move) ...........................74
從播放清單刪除場景(Edit Playlist-Delete) ............................................76
刪除播放清單的一個部分(Edit Playlist-Partial Delete) .........................77
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager............................................................79
Disc Information (Disc Info) ......................................................................79
Editing the Disc Name (Disc Info-Rename) ..............................................80
Formatting a Disc (Disc Format) ...............................................................81
Finalizing a Disc (Disc Finalize) ...............................................................82
Playing Back on a PC with DVD drive .......................................................83
Playing back a finalized disc on a DVD Player/Recorder .........................83
Unfinalizing a Disc (Disc Unfinalize) ........................................................84
光碟資訊(Disc Info) ..............................................................................79
編輯光碟名稱(Disc Info-Rename) ........................................................80
格式化光碟(Disc Format) .....................................................................81
終結光碟(Disc Finalize) ........................................................................82
在有 DVD 光碟機的電腦上播放 ................................................................83
在 DVD 播放機/錄音機上播放終結光碟 ....................................................83
取消終結(Disc Unfinalize) .....................................................................84
DVD Camcorder: Connection ...............................................................85
Setting the AV In/Out (SC-DC165 only) .....................................................85
Viewing Recordings on TV ........................................................................86
Copying a Disc onto a Tape.......................................................................88
Recording (Copying) a TV Program or Video Tape
onto a Disc (SC-DC165 only) ....................................................................89
設定 AV 輸入/輸出(僅限 SC-DC165) ...................................................85
在電視上觀賞錄製內容 ..............................................................................86
將光碟複製到錄影帶 .................................................................................88
將電視節目或錄影帶錄製(複製)到光碟(僅限 SC-DC165) ...............89
Digital Still Camera Mode......................................................................90
Using a Memory Card (Usable Memory Card) (not supplied) ...................90
Memory Card Functions .....................................................................90
Inserting a Memory Card ....................................................................90
Ejecting a Memory Card .....................................................................90
Structure of Folders and Files on the Memory Card .................................91
Selecting the Photo Quality (Photo Quality) ..............................................92
Setting the File Number (File No.) .............................................................93
Taking a Photo Image (JPEG) on the Memory Card .................................94
Viewing Photo Images (JPEG) ..................................................................95
Protection from accidental Erasure (Protect) ............................................97
Deleting Photo Images and Moving Images (Delete) ................................98
Formatting the Memory Card (Format) ....................................................100
Recording Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card ..........................101
Playing the Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card ........................102
使用記憶卡(可用記憶卡)(未提供) ....................................................90
記憶卡功能 .......................................................................................90
插入記憶卡 .......................................................................................90
退出記憶卡 .......................................................................................90
記憶卡中的資料夾與檔案結構 ...................................................................91
選擇相片品質(Photo Quality) ...............................................................92
設定檔案編號(File No.) .........................................................................93
拍攝記憶卡上的相片影像(JPEG) .........................................................94
檢視靜態影像(JPEG) ............................................................................95
保護以防止意外刪除(Protect)...............................................................97
刪除靜態影像和動態影像(Delete) ........................................................98
格式化記憶卡(Format) ........................................................................100
錄製記憶卡上的動態影像(MPEG) ......................................................101
播放記憶卡上的動態影像(MPEG) ......................................................102
4
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單 ......................................................................69
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器 ...............................................................79
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接 ..............................................................................85
數位靜態相機模式 ......................................................................................90
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Contents
目錄
Recording Still images onto a Memory Card during DVD playback .......103
Marking Images for Printing (Print Mark) .................................................104
播放 DVD 時錄製靜態影像至記憶卡 .......................................................103
標記要列印的影像(Print Mark) ...........................................................104
PictBridge™ .........................................................................................106
Printing Your Pictures-Using the PictBridge™ .........................................106
Connecting To a Printer (USB Connect) ...........................................106
Setting the Number of Prints ............................................................107
Setting the Date/Time Imprint Option ...............................................107
Printing Images.................................................................................107
Canceling the Printing ......................................................................107
列印相片-使用 PictBridgeTM .....................................................................106
連接印表機(USB 連接) ..............................................................106
設定列印份數 ..................................................................................107
設定日期/時間壓印選項 ..................................................................107
影像列印 .........................................................................................107
取消列印 .........................................................................................107
USB Interface .......................................................................................108
Using USB Interface ................................................................................108
Selecting the USB Device (USB Connect) .............................................. 110
Installing DV Media PRO Program .......................................................... 111
Connecting to a PC ................................................................................. 113
Disconnecting the USB Cable .......................................................... 113
Using the PC Camera Function ........................................................ 114
Using the USB Streaming Function .................................................. 115
Using the removable Disk Function .................................................. 115
使用 USB 介面 ........................................................................................108
選擇 USB 裝置(USB Connect) ...........................................................110
安裝 DV Media PRO Program .................................................................111
連接至電腦 .............................................................................................. 113
拔下 USB 纜線 ................................................................................113
使用 PC 相機功能 ...........................................................................114
使用 USB 串流功能 ........................................................................115
使用可卸式磁碟功能 .......................................................................115
Maintenance ......................................................................................... 116
Using Your DVD Camcorder Abroad ....................................................... 116
在國外使用 DVD 攝錄放影機 ..................................................................116
Troubleshooting................................................................................... 117
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 117
Setting menu items ..................................................................................122
Specifications ......................................................................................124
Index .....................................................................................................125
PictBridgeTM.............................................................................................106
USB 介面 ..................................................................................................108
維護 ..........................................................................................................116
故障排除 ...................................................................................................117
故障排除 .................................................................................................. 117
設定選單項目 ..........................................................................................122
規格 ..........................................................................................................124
索引 ..........................................................................................................125
5
ENGLISH
Notes and Safety Instructions
Notes regarding the Rotation of the LCD Screen
Please rotate the LCD Screen
carefully as illustrated.
Over-rotation may cause damage
to the inside of the hinge that
connects the LCD Screen to the
DVD Camcorder.
1. Open the LCD Screen 90
degrees with your finger.
2. Rotate it to the best angle to
record or play.
 If you rotate the LCD
Screen 180 degrees to the lens side, you can close the LCD
Screen with it facing out.
 This is convenient during playback operations.
Note
Refer to page 36 to adjust brightness and color of the LCD Screen.
Notes regarding the LCD Screen, Viewfinder, Lens
1. Direct sunlight can damage the
LCD Screen, the inside of the
Viewfinder or the Lens. Take
pictures of the sun only in low
light conditions, such as at dusk.
2. The LCD Screen has been
manufactured using high
precision technology.
However, there may be tiny
dots (red, blue or green in
color) that appear on the LCD Screen. These dots are normal and
do not affect the recorded picture in any way.
3. Do not pick up the DVD Camcorder by holding the Viewfinder, LCD
Screen or Battery Pack.
4. Applying excessive force to the Viewfinder may damage it.
6
臺 灣
注意事項和安全說明
有關旋轉 LCD 螢幕的注意事項
請小心旋轉 LCD 螢幕,如圖
所示。
過度旋轉可能導致連接 LCD 螢幕
和攝錄放影機的鉸鏈內部損毀。
1. 請用手指開啟 LCD 螢幕與攝錄
放影機呈 90 度角。
2. 將它旋轉至錄製或播放的最佳
角度。
 如果您將 LCD 螢幕旋轉 180
度至透鏡側,您可以關閉面
朝外的 LCD 螢幕。
 這樣在播放操作時會比較方便。
附註
如需關於調整 LCD 螢幕的亮度和色彩的資訊,請參閱第 36 頁。
有關 LCD 螢幕、觀景窗、透鏡的注意事項
1. 陽光直射會損壞 LCD 螢幕、
觀景窗的內部或透鏡。請僅在
光線微弱的情況下拍攝太陽的
相片,譬如黃昏。
2. LCD 螢幕採用高精密技術製
造。
LCD 螢幕上可能會出現一些小
點(紅色、藍色或綠色)。這
些小點屬於正常現象,不會影
響錄製的影像。
3. 請勿直接手握觀景窗、LCD 螢
幕或電池組拿起 DVD 攝錄放
影機。
4. 過度用力可能會損毀觀景窗。
ENGLISH
Notes and Safety Instructions
Notes regarding Disc Cleaning and Handling

Take care not to touch the recording side (the rainbow colored side)
of the disc with your fingers. Discs contaminated by fingerprints or
foreign substances may not play properly.

Use a soft cloth to clean the disc.

Clean lightly from the center of a disc to the
outside edge. Circling or cleaning too hard may
create scratches on the disc and further cause
the disc to play abnormally.

Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, alcohol
or anti-static spray when cleaning the disc.
It may cause a malfunction.

Press the supporting holder in the center of the
disc case for easy removal of the disc.

Handle discs by the edges and the center hole to
avoid finger marks on the recording side.

Do not bend or apply heat to the disc.

Always store discs vertically in their plastic cases
when not in use.

Store discs away from direct sunlight, heating
elements, moisture or dust.
臺 灣
注意事項和安全說明
有關清潔光碟和拿取光碟的注意事項

小心不要讓手指觸碰到光碟的錄製面(彩紅色的一面)。 光碟被
指印或其他物質污染可能導致光碟無法正常播放。

使用柔軟的布清潔光碟。

從光碟中央向外緣輕輕擦拭。 擦拭力度過大可
能使光碟產生刮痕而導致光碟無法正常播放。

請勿使用苯、稀釋劑、清潔劑、酒精或防靜電
噴霧劑清潔光碟。
這可能會使光碟損壞。

壓下光碟盒中央的卡子便能輕鬆取下光碟。

手握光碟邊緣或中央圓孔避免在光碟錄製面留
下指印。

請勿彎折或加熱光碟。

光碟不使用時請務必將其垂直存放於塑膠盒中。

將光碟存放於遠離陽光直射、發熱物體、潮濕
或灰塵之處。
7
ENGLISH
Notes and Safety Instructions
臺 灣
注意事項和安全說明
Notes regarding DVD Camcorder



Do not leave the DVD Camcorder exposed to high temperatures
(above 60 °C or 140 °F).
For example, in a parked car in the sun or exposed to direct
sunlight.
Do not let the DVD Camcorder get wet. Keep the DVD Camcorder
away from rain, sea water, and any other form of moisture.
The DVD Camcorder may get damaged if it gets wet. Sometimes a
malfunction due to exposure to liquids cannot be repaired.
A sudden rise in atmospheric temperature may cause condensation
to form inside the DVD Camcorder.
- When you move the DVD Camcorder from a cold location to a
warm location (e.g. from outside to inside during the winter.)
- When you move the DVD Camcorder from a cool location to a
hot location (e.g. from inside to outside during the summer.)
有關 DVD 攝錄放影機的注意事項



Notices regarding Copyright (SC-DC165 only)
Television programs, video tapes, DVD titles, films, and other program
materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized copying of copyrighted material may be against the law.
All the trade names and registered trademarks mentioned in this
manual or other documentation provided with your Samsung product
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
有關著作權的注意事項(僅限 SC-DC165)
電視節目、錄影帶、DVD 節目、影片,以及其他節目資料均受著作
權法保護。
未經授權複製受著作權法保護的資料可能會違反法律。
此手冊或其他三星產品說明文件中提及的所有產品名稱和註冊商標是
其各自所有者的商標或註冊商標。
Servicing & Replacement Parts





Do not attempt to service this DVD Camcorder yourself.
Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
or other hazards.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician
has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer that have
the same characteristics as the original parts.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other
hazards.
8
請勿將 DVD 攝錄放影機暴露在高溫下(超過 60°C 或 140°F)。
例如,在陽光下停放的車內或陽光直射之下。
請勿讓 DVD 攝錄放影機受潮。DVD 攝錄放影機必須遠離雨水、
海水,以及任何其他形態的濕氣。
若 DVD 攝錄放影機受潮,將會損壞。本機受潮所導致的損壞有時
可能無法修理。
突然升高的氣溫將導致本 DVD 攝錄放影機內部形成濕氣凝結。
- 當您將 DVD 攝錄放影機從寒冷的地方帶入溫暖的地方
(如,冬天時從戶外帶入室內)。
- 當您將 DVD 攝錄放影機從涼爽的地方帶入炎熱的地方
(如,夏天時從室內帶出戶外)。
維修和更換零件




請勿嘗試自行維修本 DVD 攝錄放影機。
打開或移除機蓋可能會讓您暴露在危險電壓或其他危險中。
請讓合格的專業技術人員進行維修。
在需要更換零件時,請確保維修技術人員使用製造商指定的更換
零件,其特性與原始零件相同。

未經授權的更換可能會導致火災、觸電或其他危險。
ENGLISH
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
臺 灣
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
Features














DVD Disc Camcorder
DVD-VIDEO recording with 3 1/2inch (8cm) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R
DL(Dual Layer) discs.
High Power Zoom Lens
Offers you 30x (SC-DC163 only), 33x (SC-DC164/DC165 only) High Power
Zoom Lens.
USB Interface for Digital Image Data Transfer
You can transfer images to a PC using the USB interface without an
add-on card.
Photo Capture
The Photo Capture function lets you capture the scene you want while the
disc is in play, and save as a still image on a Memory Card.
1200x Digital Zoom
Allows you to magnify an image up to 1200 times its original size.
Color TFT LCD
A high-resolution color TFT LCD gives you clean, sharp images as well
as the ability to review your recordings immediately.
Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS)
The DIS compensates for any handshake, reducing unstable images,
particularly at high magnification.
Various Digital Effects
The Digital Effects allow you to give your recordings a special look.
Back Light Compensation (BLC)
The BLC function compensates for the bright background behind a
subject you’re recording.
Program AE
The Program AE enables you to alter the shutter speed and aperture to
suit the type of scene/action to be recorded.
Digital Still Camera Function
- Using a Memory Card, you can easily record and playback standard
photo images.
- You can transfer standard photo images on a Memory Card to your
PC using the USB interface.
Moving Image Recording
Moving image recording makes it possible to record video onto a
Memory Card.
Multi Memory Card Slot
Multi Memory Card slot that is compatible with Memory Stick (Duo),
Memory Stick PRO, MMC and SD.
Multi OSD Language
You can select the desired OSD language from OSD list.
特性














DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD-VIDEO 標題製作,3 1/2 吋(8公分)DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
(Dual Layer)光碟。
高功能縮放鏡頭
提供高功能縮放鏡頭:30 倍縮放鏡頭(僅限 SC-DC163)、33 倍縮放
鏡頭(僅限 SC-DC164/D165)。
用於傳輸數位影像資料的 USB 介面
您可以使用 USB 介面將影像傳輸到電腦,而不需要附加介面卡。
拍攝相片
「拍攝相片」功能可讓您在光碟播放時拍攝您想要的景象,然後將影
像在記憶卡中儲存為靜止影像。
1200 倍數位縮放
可以讓您將影像放大至其原始大小的 1200 倍。
彩色 TFT LCD
高解析度彩色 TFT LCD 可為您提供明亮、清晰影像,同時具有立即檢
視錄影畫面的功能。
數位防手震功能(DIS)
DIS 可補償 因手持拍攝時手抖而引起的影像晃動,尤其是在較高的放
大倍數下。
各種數位效果
數位效果可添加各種特殊效果,讓所拍攝的影像別具一格。
背光補償(BLC)
BLC 功能可以補償您所錄製的主體背後的明亮背景。
程序自動曝光
程序自動曝光可以讓您改變快門速度和光圈,以適合所拍攝的場景/動
作類型。
數位靜態相機功能
- 您可以使用記憶卡輕鬆地錄製和播放標準靜態影像。
- 您可以使用 USB 介面將標準靜態影像從記憶卡傳輸到 PC。
動態影像錄製
動態影像錄製可將視訊錄製到記憶卡。
多重記憶卡插槽
與 Memory Stick (Duo)、Memory Stick PRO、MMC 和 SD 相容的多重
記憶卡插槽。
多種 OSD 語言
您可以從 OSD 清單中選擇所要的 OSD 語言。
9
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
Usable Discs
可以播放的光碟
Usable discs and logos
可使用光碟和標誌
DVD-R / DVD-RW (3 1/2inches (8cm))
DVD-R / DVD-RW(3 1/2 吋(8公分))
DVD+RW (3 1/2inches (8cm))
DVD+RW(3 1/2 吋(8公分))
DVD+ReWritable
DVD+ReWritable
DVD+R DL (Dual Layer) (3 1/2inches (8cm))
DVD+R DL(Dual Layer)(3 1/2 吋(8公分))
DVD+R DL
Unusable discs
 You may not use 5inches (12cm) CD/DVD discs.
 Unusable 3 1/2inch (8cm) discs.
- CD
- CD-R
- CD-RW
- DVD-ROM
- DVD+R (Single Layer)
- DVD-RAM
- DVD-R(Dual Layer)
 Floppy Disk, MO, MD, iD, LD
Notes
 We are not responsible for data loss on a disc.
 You may not be able to play discs recorded from a PC or DVD
recorder. When such a case occurs, the message, Bad Disc! may
be displayed.
 We do not warranty any damage or loss incurred due to recording
and playback failure caused by disc or card malfunction.
 We take no responsibility and offer no compensation for any
recording failure, loss of recorded or edited material and/or damage
to the recorder arising from the misuse of discs.
10
DVD+R DL
不可使用光碟



您不可使用 5 吋(12 公分)CD/DVD 光碟。
無法播放的 3.5 吋(8 公分)光碟。
- CD
- CD-R
- CD-RW
- DVD-ROM
- DVD+R(Single Layer)
- DVD-RAM
- DVD-R(Dual Layer)
磁片、MO、MD、iD、LD
附註




光碟上的資料如有遺失,我們概不負責。
您可能無法播放使用個人電腦或 DVD 錄影機錄製的光碟。 發生
此情況時,訊息 Bad Disc! 可能會顯示。
因光碟或卡片故障造成錄製或播放錯誤所導致的損害或損失,
我們不給予保固。
因錯誤使用光碟造成的任何錄製失誤、錄製或編輯資料的損失、
以及(或)錄影機的損害,我們概不負責,同時不給予賠償。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Disc Type Description
Disc Type
Mode
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
光碟類型說明
DVD-R DVD+R DL
(3 1/2inches (3 1/2inches
(8cm))
(8cm))
–
–
Capacity
1.4G
2.6G
Formatting a new disc 
page 41
DVD-RW (3 1/inches (8cm))
VR (Video Recording) Video
1.4G
1.4G
DVD+RW
(3 1/2inches
(8cm))
光碟類型
DVD-R
DVD+R DL
(3 1/2 吋
(3 1/2 吋
(8公分)) (8公分))
DVD-RW
(3 1/2 吋(8公分))
DVD+RW
(3 1/2 吋
(8公分))
–
模式
–
–
VR(視訊錄製)
視訊
–
1.4G
容量
1.4G
2.6G
1.4G
1.4G
1.4G
Auto
Auto
O
格式化新光碟
第 41 頁
自動
自動
Recording page 43
O
O
O
O
O
錄製 第 43 頁
O
O
O
O
Rewrite
X
X
O
O
O
覆寫
X
X
O
O
O
Playback on other DVD
Players 
(Finalize) page 82
O
O
X
O
O
在其他 DVD 播放器上播
放 (終結)第 82 頁
O
O
X
O
O
Playback on other DVD
Recorders  page 83
O
O
O
O
O
在其他 DVD 錄影機上播
放 第 83 頁
O
O
O
O
O
–
終結後進行額外錄製
(取消終結) 第 84 頁
X
X
O
O
–
編輯 第 72 頁
X
X
O
X
X
格式化光碟以重新使用
(格式化) 第 81 頁
X
X
O
O
O
O
Additional recording after
finalization (Unfinalize)
page 84
X
Editing page 72
X
X
O
X
X
Reusing a disc by
formatting  (Format)
page 81
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
 O: possible / X: not possible / -: not needed
You must format a new disc before recording on it.
When loading a DVD-RW disc you must format it in Video or VR mode.
When loading a DVD+RW disc you must format it.
We cannot guarantee that you will be able to play back in all other
manufacturer’s DVD Camcorders, DVD Players/Recorders, or
PC’s. For compatibility information, please refer to the manual of
the device you wish to play back on.
 Discs must be finalized before they can be played on standard
DVD Players/Recorders.
Refer to the page 12 for Finalized disc compatibility.
 You can play back DVD+RW discs on DVD Players/Recorders
without finalizing them.
DVD+RW discs do not need to be Finalized/Unfinalized.
 When formatting a recorded disc, the data recorded on the disc is
deleted and disc capacity is restored, enabling you to re-use the disc.




O
O
O
 O: 可能 / X: 不可能 / -: 不需要




光碟在開始錄製前必須先進行格式化。
載入 DVD-RW 光碟時,光碟必須以 Video 或 VR 模式格式化。
載入 DVD+RW 光碟時,光碟必須格式化。
我們不擔保您可以在所有其他廠牌的 DVD 攝錄放影機、DVD 播放機/錄
影機、或個人電腦上播放光碟。有關相容性的資訊,請參閱您要用來播
放光碟之裝置的手冊。
 光碟必須先終結才能在標準 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。
有關終結光碟相容性的資訊,請參閱第 12 頁。
 DVD+RW 光碟不需終結也可在 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。
DVD+RW 光碟不需要終結/取消終結功能。
 錄製過的光碟進行格式化時會將光碟中的資料刪除,光碟容量便能
回復讓您重新使用光碟。
11
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
How to use the DVD Camcorder easily
You can record any desired image and edit and playback the disc on a
DVD Camcorder, most DVD players, and PCs after finalizing the disc.
Step 1
如何輕鬆容易地使用 DVD 攝錄放影機
您可以錄製任何想要的影像。光碟終結後您可以在 DVD 攝錄放影機、
多數 DVD 播放機及個人電腦上編輯和播放。
Inserting and Formatting a Disc
步驟 1
Selecting the desired disc and disc formatting page 41
插入和格式化光碟
選擇需要的光碟和光碟格式化 
第 41 頁
Step 2
Recording the Desired Image
步驟 2
錄製需要的影像
Step 3
Editing Recorded Images
步驟 3
編輯錄製的影像
You may edit only in DVD-RW (VR Mode). page 72
Step 4
Finalizing a Disc
-
步驟 4
Discs must be finalized before they can be played
on standard DVD Players/Recorders.
You may play back DVD+RW discs on other
devices without finalizing them.
Step 5
您僅可以編輯 DVD-RW(VR 模式)。 
第 72 頁
-
步驟 5
Playback on a DVD Camcorder, DVD Player/Recorder, or PC
在 DVD 攝錄放影機、DVD 播放機/錄影機、或個人電腦
上播放
DVD-RW(VR 模式): 您僅可在支援 DVD-RW VR 模式
的 DVD 錄影機上播放。 
第 83 頁
Playing the finalized disc
播放已終結的光碟
Disc Type
Mode
Player/Recorder
光碟類型
DVD-R/+R DL
-
DVD Player, DVD Recorder
DVD-R/+R DL
Video
DVD Player, DVD Recorder
VR
DVD Recorder that supports DVD-RW VR mode.
 Playback is not guaranteed in all DVD Players/Recorders. For compatibility details, refer to your
DVD Players/Recorder’s owner’s manual.
 You can play back DVD+RW discs on other DVD Players/Recorders without finalizing them.
12
光碟必須先終結才能在標準 DVD 播放機/錄影機上
播放。
DVD+RW 光碟不需終結也可以在其他裝置上播放。
-
DVD-RW (VR mode) : You may play back only on DVD
Recorders that support DVD-RW VR mode. page 83
DVD-RW
終結光碟
DVD-RW


模式
播放機/錄影機
-
DVD 播放機、DVD 錄影機
視訊
DVD 播放機、DVD 錄影機
視訊錄製
支援 DVD-RW VR 模式的 DVD 錄影機。
不擔保可在所有的 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。 有關相容性的詳情,請參閱您的 DVD 播放機/錄
影機的使用手冊。
DVD+RW 光碟不需終結也可在 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Accessories Supplied with the DVD Camcorder
Make sure that the following basic accessories are supplied with your
DVD Camcorder.
Basic Accessories
1. Lithium Ion Battery Pack
(SB-LSM80)
2. AC Power Adapter
(AA-E9 TYPE)
3. Multi-AV Cable
4. Instruction Book
5. Lithium Batteries for
Remote Control
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
and Clock.
(TYPE: CR2025)
6. Remote Control
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
7. USB Cable
8. Software CD
(DV Media PRO)
9. Lens Cover
10. Lens Cover Strap
11. 3 1/2inches (8cm) DVD-RW
Disc (SC-DC165 only)
Optional Accessory
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的配件
請確定 DVD 攝錄放影機提供下列基本配件。
1. Lithium Ion Battery Pack
(SB-LSM80)
2. AC Power Adapter
(AA-E9 TYPE)
3. Multi-AV Cable
4. Instruction Book
5. Lithium Batteries (CR2025)
6. Remote Control
7. USB Cable
8. Software CD
9. Lens Cover
10. Lens Cover Strap
11. 3 1/2inches (8cm)
DVD-RW Disc
12. Carrying Case
基本配件
1.
鋰離子電池組
(SB-LSM80)
2. 交流電源適配器
(AA-E9 型)
3. Multi-AV 纜線
4. 說明書
5. 遙控器
(僅限 SC-DC164/
DC165)和時鐘的鋰電
池。(類型:CR2025)
6. 遙控器
(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
7. USB 纜線
8. 軟體光碟
(DV Media PRO)
9. 透鏡蓋
10. 透鏡蓋帶子
11. 3 1/2 吋(8公分) DVD-RW
光碟(僅限 SC-DC165)
可選購的附件
12. 攜帶套
12. Carrying Case
Note
Parts and accessories
are available at your local
Samsung dealer.
附註
零件和配件請向您當地的
Samsung 經銷商購買。
13
ENGLISH
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Front & Left View
1. ACCESS Indicator
2. OPEN Switch
臺 灣
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
正視圖和左視圖
7. QUICK MENU Button
8. Joystick (Up/Down/Left/Right/OK)
9. EASY.Q Button
3. Lens
10. TFT LCD Screen
4. LED LIGHT (SC-DC165 only)
5. Remote Sensor
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
6. Internal MIC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ACCESS Indicator page 40
OPEN Switch page 40
Lens
LED LIGHT (SC-DC165 only) page 49
Remote Sensor (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
Internal MIC
QUICK MENU Button page 27
Joystick (Up/Down/Left/Right/OK) page 26
EASY.Q Button page 44
TFT LCD Screen
14
1. ACCESS 指示器 第 40 頁
2. OPEN 開關 第 40 頁
3. 透鏡
4. LED 燈(僅限 SC-DC165)第 49 頁
5. 遙控感應窗(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
6. 內部麥克風
7. QUICK MENU 按鈕 第 27 頁
8. Joystick(上/下/左/右/OK)第 26 頁
9. EASY.Q 按鈕 第 44 頁
10. TFT LCD 螢幕
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Left Side View
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
左視圖
1. MENU Button
2. DISPLAY Button
7. Charging Indicator
3. Mode Switch (DISC/CARD)
8. Jack Cover
4. Built-In Speaker
9. USB Jack
5. MF/AF/MULTI DISP. Button
10. Multi cable Jack
11. DC IN Jack
6. C.NITE/LED LIGHT (SC-DC165 only)
6. COLOR NITE (SC-DC163/DC164 only)
12. VOL (-/+) Button
13. Function Buttons (below)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.
7.
8.
MENU Button
DISPLAY Button page 29
Mode Switch (DISC/CARD)
Built-In Speaker
MF/AF/MULTI DISP. Button
page 52/95
C.NITE/LED LIGHT
(SC-DC165 only) page 49
COLOR NITE (SC-DC163/
DC164 only) page 48
Charging Indicator
Jack Cover
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
USB Jack
Multi cable Jack
DC IN Jack
VOL (-/+) Button
Function Buttons
Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
MENU 按鈕
DISPLAY 按鈕 第 29 頁
Mode 開關(DISC/CARD)
內建喇叭
6.
6.
 M.Player Mode : Memory Player Mode
<Player Mode>
<Camera Mode>

Backward Search/Skip



Button
5.
<M.Player Mode>
Photo image
Moving image
-
Backward Skip
Backward
Search
Forward Search/Skip
-
Forward Skip
Forward Search
Play/Still
FADE
Slide Show
Play/Still
Stop
BLC
-
Stop
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
MF/AF/MULTI DISP. 按鈕
第 52/95 頁
C.NITE/LED LIGHT
(僅限 SC-DC165)第 49 頁
COLOR NITE(色彩夜拍)(僅
限 SC-DC163/DC164)第 48 頁
充電指示器
插孔蓋
USB 插孔
多用纜線插孔
DC IN 插孔
VOL(-/+)按鈕
功能按鈕
15
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Right & Top View
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
右視圖和頂視圖
1. PHOTO Button
7. Zoom Lever
2. Focus Adjustment Knob
3. Viewfinder
8. Disc Cover
4. External MIC Jack
5. Power Switch
9. Hand Strap
6. Start/Stop Button
1.
2.
3.
4.
PHOTO Button page 103
Focus Adjustment Knob page 38
Viewfinder
External MIC Jack
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Power Switch (ON/OFF/
Start/Stop Button
Zoom Lever
Disc Cover
Hand Strap
16
(Camera)/
(Player))
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PHOTO 按鈕 第 103 頁
焦距調整旋鈕 第 38 頁
觀景窗
外接式麥克風插孔
(Camera)/
Power 開關 (ON/OFF/
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start/Stop 按鈕
縮放桿
光碟蓋
手提帶
(Player))
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Rear & Bottom View
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
後視圖和底視圖
2. Tripod Receptacle
3. MULTI CARD SLOT
4. Battery Release switch
1. Lithium Battery Cover
5. Hand Strap Hook
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lithium Battery Cover
Tripod Receptacle
MULTI CARD SLOT
Battery Release switch
Hand Strap Hook
Usable Memory Cards
SD
MMC
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
鋰電池蓋
三腳架底座
多重卡插槽
電池釋放閂
手提帶扣
17
ENGLISH
Getting to Know Your DVD Camcorder
Remote Control (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
1. START/STOP
2. DISPLAY
3. /(Skip)
4.  (Stop)
5. (Play/Still)
6. MENU
臺 灣
瞭解您的 DVD 攝錄放影機
遙控器(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
8. PHOTO
9. W/T (Zoom)
10. /(Search)
11. | (Slow)
12. Q-MENU
7. Up( )/Down( )/Left( )/Right( )/OK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
START/STOP
DISPLAY page 29
/(Skip)
 (Stop)
 (Play/Still)
MENU
Up( )/Down( )/Left( )/Right( )/OK
PHOTO page 94
W/T (Zoom) page 45
/(Search)
| (Slow)
Q-MENU
18
1. START/STOP
2. DISPLAY 第 29 頁
3. /(略過)
4. (停止)
5.  / (播放/靜止)
6. MENU
7. 上( )/下( )/左( )/右( )/OK
8. PHOTO 第 94 頁
9. W/T(縮放)第 45 頁
10. /(搜尋)
11. |(慢動作)
12. Q-MENU
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Using the Hand Strap & Lens Cover
使用手提帶和透鏡蓋
It is very important to ensure that the Hand Strap has been correctly
adjusted before you begin your recording.
The Hand Strap enables you to:
- Hold the DVD Camcorder in a stable, comfortable position.
- Press the [Zoom] lever and [Start/Stop] button without having to
change the position of your hand.
開始拍攝之前,確定正確調整手提帶是非常重要的。
手提帶可以讓您:
- 穩固安全地手握 DVD 攝錄放影機。
- 不需要改變手的位置,即可按下 [Zoom] 桿 和 [Start/Stop]
按鈕。
Hand Strap
手提帶
1.
1. Pull and open the Hand Strap and
release the Hand Strap.
Insert the Hand Strap into the Hand
Strap Hook.
2. Insert your hand into the Hand Strap
and adjust its length.
3. Close the Hand Strap.
Lens Cover
1. Hook up the Lens Cover with the Lens
Cover Strap as illustrated.
2. Pull and open the Hand Strap and
release the Hand Strap.
3. Hook up the Lens Cover Strap to the
Hand Strap and adjust it following the
steps as described for the Hand Strap.
4. Close the Hand Strap.
Installing the Lens Cover after
Operation
Press buttons on both sides of the Lens
Cover, then insert it so it covers the DVD
Camcorder Lens.
1
2
1
2
3
4
2.
3.
打開和拉出手提帶並釋放手提帶。
將手提帶穿入手提帶扣。
將您的手穿過手提帶然後調整長度。
合上手提帶。
透鏡蓋
1.
2.
3.
4.
使用透鏡蓋帶子連接透鏡蓋,如圖
所示。
打開和拉出手提帶並釋放手提帶。
將透鏡蓋帶子連接到手提帶,然後依
照手提帶所述步驟進行調整。
合上手提帶。
完成操作後安裝透鏡蓋
按下鏡頭蓋兩旁的按鈕,將鏡頭蓋插入蓋
住 DVD 攝錄放影機鏡頭。
19
ENGLISH
Preparation
Lithium Battery Installation
Lithium Battery Installation for the Internal Clock
臺 灣
準備工作
安裝鋰電池
安裝內部時鐘的鋰電池
1. Remove the Battery Pack from the
rear of the DVD Camcorder.
2. Open the Lithium Battery Cover on the
rear of the DVD Camcorder.
3. Position the Lithium Battery in the
Lithium Battery Holder, with the
positive (+) terminal face up.
Be careful not to reverse the polarity
of the Battery.
4. Close the Lithium Battery Cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
從 DVD 攝錄放影機背面取出電池組。
打開 DVD 攝錄放影機背面的鋰電池蓋。
將鋰電池放入鋰電池座,正極(+)端
向上。
請勿放錯電池的正負極方向。
合上鋰電池蓋。
Installing the Lithium Battery in the Remote Control (SC-DC164/DC165 only) 安裝遙控器鋰電池(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
1. Turn the battery holder counterclockwise
(as indicated with [ ] mark), using your
fingernail or a coin to open it. The battery
1
2
holder opens.
2. Insert the battery with the positive (+)
terminal face down and press it firmly
until you hear locking sound.
3. Place the battery holder to match its
[ ] mark with the [] mark on the
remote control, and turn the battery holder clockwise to fix it.
Precautions regarding the Lithium Battery
1. The Lithium Battery maintains the clock function and preset
contents of the memory; even if the Battery Pack or AC Power
adapter is removed.
2. The Lithium Battery for the DVD Camcorder lasts about 6 months
under normal operation from time of installation.
3. When the Lithium Battery becomes weak or dead, the date/time
indicator will display 12:00 AM JAN.01.2006 when you set the
Date/Time to On. When this occurs, replace the Lithium Battery
with a new one (type CR2025).
4. There is a danger of explosion if Lithium Battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Warning: Keep the Lithium Battery out of reach of children.
Should a battery be swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
20
1.
3
2.
Battery Holder
3.
以逆時針方向轉動電池座(如 [ ] 標
示),使用您的指甲或一枚硬幣以逆時
針方向轉動開啟電池座。電池座開啟。
將電池放入鋰電池座,正極(+)端朝
下,用力向下壓直到聽見鎖住的聲音。
將電池座的 [ ] 標記對齊遙控器上的
[] 標記,然後以順時鐘方向旋轉電池
座將其固定。
有關鋰電池的注意事項
1.
2.
3.
4.
鋰電池可以保持時鐘功能及預設記憶體內容,即使移除了電池組或交
流電源適配器。
在正常操作下, DVD 攝錄放影機的鋰電池從裝入時間起可以維持大約
6 個月。
若鋰電池電量不足或耗盡,日期/時間指示器將會顯示 12:00 AM
JAN.01.2006,若您將 Date/Time 設定為 On。發生此情況時,請更換
新的鋰電池(CR2025 型)。
若沒有正確更換鋰電池,將會有爆炸的危險。請使用相同類型的電池
來更換。
警告:請勿讓兒童接觸到鋰電池。 若不慎吞下電池,請立刻求醫。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Using the Lithium Ion Battery Pack
使用鋰離子電池組
 Use SB-LSM80 or SB-LSM160 (not supplied) Battery Pack only.
 The Battery Pack may be charged a little at the time of purchase.
僅使用 SB-LSM80 或 SB-LSM160(未提供)電池組。

電池組在購買時可能已經有少量電量。

Charging the Lithium Ion Battery Pack
為鋰離子電池組充電
1. 將 [Power] 開關轉至 [Off]。
2. 將電池組裝入 DVD 攝錄放影機。
3. 將交流電源適配器(AA-E9 型)連接
到牆上插座。
4. 開啟 LCD 螢幕和插孔蓋。
5. 將直流電纜線連接到攝錄放影機上的
直流電插孔。
充電指示器將會開始閃爍,顯示電池
正在充電。
6. 電池完全充電後,從 DVD 攝錄放影
機拔下電池組和交流電變壓器。即使
將電源開關轉至關閉,電池組仍然會
放電。
1. Turn the [Power] switch to [Off].
2. Attach the Battery Pack to the DVD
Camcorder.
3. Connect the AC Power adapter
(AA-E9 TYPE) to a wall socket.
4. Open the LCD Screen and Jack
Cover.
5. Connect the DC cable to the DC IN
Power Switch
jack on the DVD Camcorder.
The charging indicator will start to
blink, showing that the Battery is
charging.
6. When the Battery is fully charged,
disconnect the Battery Pack and the
AC Power Adapter from the DVD
Camcorder. Even with the power switched off, the
5
Battery Pack will still discharge.
Blinking time
閃爍時間
Charging rate
充電率
Once per second
Less than 50%
每秒一次
Twice per second
50% ~ 75%
每秒兩次
50% ~ 75%
Three times per second
75% ~ 90%
每秒三次
75% ~ 90%
Blinking stops and stays on
90% ~ 100%
On for a second and off for a
second
Error - Reset the Battery Pack and the DC
Cable
<Charging indicator>
少於 50%
停止閃爍並保持亮起
90% ~ 100%
亮起一秒然後熄滅一秒
錯誤 - 重設電池組和直流電纜線
21
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Charging, Recording Times based on Battery Type




If you close the LCD Screen, it switches off and the Viewfinder
switches on automatically.
The continuous recording times given in the table below are
approximations.
Actual recording time depends on usage.
The continuous recording times in the operating instructions are
measured using a fully charged Battery Pack at 77 °F (25 °C).
Even when the power is switched off, the Battery Pack will still
discharge if it is left attached to the device.
充電、錄製時間以各電池類型為準




若合上 LCD 螢幕,它將關閉並自動開啟觀景窗。
下表提供的連續錄製時間為大約數字。
實際的錄製時間視使用情況而定。
操作說明中提供的連續錄製時間是根據在 77 °F(25 °C)溫度下
使用完全充電 的電池組所測得的結果。
若將電池組留在本設備內,即使將電源開關轉至關閉,電池組仍
然會放電。
Battery Type
SB-LSM80 (AD43-00136A)
SB-LSM160 (not supplied)
電池類型
SB-LSM80 (AD43-00136A)
Charging time
Approx.1hr 20min
Approx. 3hr
充電時間
約 1 小時 20 分鐘
Mode
LCD ON
Viewfinder
LCD ON
Viewfinder
LCD ON
Viewfinder
Continuous
Playback time Mode
recording time
Continuous
recording time
XP
Approx. 55min
Approx. 1hr
10min
XP
Approx. 1hr 45min
Approx. 2hr
15min
SP
Approx. 1hr
Approx. 1hr
15min
SP
Approx. 1hr 55min
Approx. 2hr
25min
LP
Approx. 1hr
5min
Approx. 1hr
20min
LP
Approx. 2hr 5min
Approx. 2hr
35min
 Measured times shown above are based on model SC-DC163.
The amount of continuous recording time available depends on;
- The type and capacity of the Battery Pack you are using.
- Ambient temperature.
- How often the Zoom function is used.
- Type of use (DVD Camcorder/Camera/With LCD Screen etc.).
It is recommended that you have several batteries available.
22
模式
Playback time
開啟 LCD
觀景窗
開啟 LCD
觀景窗
開啟 LCD
觀景窗
連續錄製時間
播放時間
XP
SB-LSM160(未提供)
約 3 小時
模式
連續錄製時間
播放時間
大約 55 分鐘
大約 1 小時
10 分鐘
XP
大約 1 小時
45 分鐘
大約 2 小時
15 分鐘
SP
大約 1 小時
大約 1 小時
15 分鐘
SP
大約 1 小時
55 分鐘
大約 2 小時
25 分鐘
LP
大約 1 小時
5 分鐘
大約 1 小時
20 分鐘
LP
大約 2 小時
5 分鐘
大約 2 小時
35 分鐘
 上述的估量值以 SC-DC163 機型為準。
可用的連續錄製時間視以下情況而定;
- 您使用的電池組類型和容量。
- 周圍環境的溫度。
- 是否經常使用縮放功能。
- 使用類型(攝錄放影機/相機/具備 LCD 螢幕等)。
建議您準備數個備用電池。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Battery Level Display
電池容量顯示
電池容量顯示可指出電池組的剩餘電量。
a. 完全充電
b. 使用 20~40%
c. 使用 40~80%
d. 使用 80~95%(紅色)
e. 完全用完(閃爍)
( DVD 攝錄放影機就快關閉,請儘快更換電
池。)
The battery level display indicates the amount of
power remaining in the Battery Pack.
a. Fully charged
b. 20~40% used
c. 40~80% used
d. 80~95% used (red)
e. Completely used (Blinking)
(The DVD Camcorder will turn off soon, change
the battery as soon as possible.)
The Finalize/Format functions are not available at battery level ‘d’
and ‘e’.
 At battery level ‘e’
The battery becomes low in capacity and the <
> indicator
blinks on the display.
The screen will turn blue when the battery is almost completely
discharged.
終結和格式化功能在電量「d」和「e」時無法使用。
 在電池容量「e」時
電池容量變低並且 <
> 指示器在畫面閃爍。
電池幾乎完全沒電時,螢幕會轉為藍色。
Battery Pack Management
電池組管理






The Battery Pack should be recharged in an environment between
32 °F (0 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).
The Battery Pack should never be charged in a room with a
temperature that is below 32 °F (0 °C).
The life and capacity of the Battery Pack will be reduced if it is used in
temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C) or left in temperatures above 104 °F
(40 °C) for a long period of time, even when it is fully recharged.
Do not put the Battery Pack near any heat source (i.e. fire or a heater).
Do not disassemble, apply pressure to, or heat the Battery Pack.
Do not allow the + and – terminals of the Battery Pack to be
short-circuited. It may cause leakage, heat generation, induce
overheating or fire.






電池組必須在介於 32 °F(0 °C)和 104 °F(40 °C)的環境溫度
下重新充電。
請不要在溫度低於 32 °F(0 °C)的室內為電池組充電。
若在溫度低於 32 °F(0 °C)的地方使用電池組,或者電池組長時
間處於溫度高於 104 °F(40 °C)的地方,電池組的使用壽命和容
量將會減少,即使它已經完全充電。
請勿將電池組放在靠近熱源的地方(如火或暖器)。
請勿拆開,擠壓或加熱電池組。
請勿讓電池組的 + 正極和 – 負極端形成短路。 這可能導致電池
組漏液、發出熱量,引起過熱或火災。
23
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Maintaining the Battery Pack
保養電池組










Please refer to the Table on page 22 for approximate continuous
recording time.
The recording time is affected by temperature and environmental
conditions.
The recording time shortens dramatically in a cold environment.
The continuous recording times in the operating instructions are
measured using a fully charged Battery Pack at 77 °F (25 °C).
The remaining battery time may differ from the approximate
continuous recording times given in the instructions.
When replacing the battery pack, only use the same type as is
supplied with this camcorder and is available from your SAMSUNG
retailer.
When the Battery reaches the end of its life, please contact your
local dealer.
The batteries have to be dealt with as chemical waste.
Make sure that the Battery Pack is fully charged before starting to
record.
A brand new Battery Pack is not charged. Before using the Battery
Pack, you need to charge it completely.
Fully discharging a Lithium Ion Battery damages the internal cells.
The Battery Pack may be prone to leakage when fully discharged.
To preserve battery power, keep your DVD Camcorder turned off
when you are not operating it.
If your DVD Camcorder is in Camera Mode, and it is left in STBY
mode without being operated for more than 5 minutes with a
disc inserted, it will automatically turn itself off to protect against
unnecessary battery discharge.
Make sure that the Battery Pack is fitted firmly into place.
Do not drop the Battery Pack. Dropping the Battery Pack may
damage it.
24










請參考第 22 頁的表,以獲知大約的連續錄製時間。
錄製時間會受溫度和環境條件的影嚮。
在寒冷的環境下,錄製時間會顯著縮短。
操作說明中提供的連續錄製時間是在 77°F (25°C) 下使用完全
充電的電池組所測得的結果。
剩餘的電池時間可能會與說明中提供的大約連續錄製時間有所
不同。
更換電池組時,請僅使用與本攝影機隨附電池相同的類型,您可
以向 SAMSUNG 零售商購買所需電池。
在電池到達其使用壽命時,請與當地經銷商聯繫。
必須以處理化學廢物的方式處理該電池。
開始拍攝之前,請確定電池組已經完全充電。
全新的電池組並未經過充電。使用電池組之前,您必須將它完全
充電。
鋰離子電池若完全放電可能會損壞內部元件。
完全放電可能導致電池組漏液。
為節省電池電量,在不使用時請關閉 DVD 攝錄放影機電源。
若 DVD 攝錄放影機處於 Camera Mode,並在插入光碟的情況
下,留在 STBY 模式不操作超過 5 分鐘,它將自動關閉以避免不
必要的電池耗電。
確定電池組已穩固安裝到位。
切勿讓電池組掉落。掉落的電池組可能損壞。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Connecting a Power Source
連接電源
 There are two types of power source that can be connected to your
DVD Camcorder.
- The AC Power adapter: used for indoor recording.
- The Battery Pack: used for outdoor recording.
 有兩種電源類型可以連接 DVD 攝錄放影機。
- 交流電源適配器:用於室內拍攝。
- 電池組:用於戶外拍攝。
Using a Household Power Source
使用家中電源
Connect to a household
power source to use the DVD
Camcorder without having to
worry about the battery power.
You can keep the Battery Pack
attached; the battery power will
not be consumed.
使用家中電源為 DVD 攝錄放影
機供電,就不必常常擔心電池電
量的多寡。您可以讓電池組留在
設備中,電池電量將不會消
耗掉。
Power Switch
1. Connect the AC Power
adapter (AA-E9 TYPE) to a
wall socket.
The plug and wall socket
type may differ according to
your resident country.
2. Open the LCD Screen and Jack Cover.
3. Connect the DC cable to the DC IN jack of the DVD Camcorder.
1. 將交流電源適配器(AA-E9
型)連接到牆上插座。
牆上插座和插頭類型會因不
同的國家而異。
2. 開啟 LCD 螢幕和插孔蓋。
3. 將直流電纜線連接到 DVD
攝錄放影機的直流電
插孔。
4. 按住 [Power] 開關的綠色標籤,並轉動為 [On] 或 [Off] 可將 DVD
攝錄放影機設定為各種模式。
4. Set the DVD Camcorder to each mode by holding down the Green
Tab on the [Power] switch and turning it to [On] or [Off].
25
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
About the Operating Modes
關於操作模式
 The operating modes are determined by the position of the [Power]
and [Mode] switchs.
 Set the Operation Mode by adjusting [Power] and [Mode] switchs
before operating any functions.
 Each time you move the [Power] switch downward, it toggles
(Player)] mode.
(Camera)] and [
between [
Mode Name
<Camera Mode>
 操作模式取決於 [Power] 開關和 [Mode] 開關的位置。
 操作任何功能之前,調整 [Power] 開關和 [Mode] 開關來設定操
作模式。
(Camera)] 和
 每次按下 [Power] 開關,將會在 [
(Player)] 模式之間切換。
[
<Player Mode>
<M.Cam Mode>
<M.Player Mode>
[Power] Switch
[Mode] Switch
 M.Cam Mode : Memory Camera Mode / M.Player Mode : Memory Player Mode
Using the Joystick
 The Joystick is used to make a selection and to move
the cursor left, right, up and down. Using the Joystick,
you can easily make your selection and navigate the
menu.
1. Move to a previous menu item / Adjust the selected item
(to the left).
3
2. Move to a sub menu item / Adjust
the selected item (to the right).
3. Move to a lower menu item.
4. Move to an upper menu item.
5. Press to select the chosen item.
26
使用搖桿
1
4
2
5

可使用搖桿選擇選項,以及將游標
向左、右、上下移動。您可以使用
搖桿輕鬆地選擇選項和導覽選單。
1.
移至上一個選單項目/調整選定的項
目(往左)。
移至子選單項目/調整選定的項目
(往右)。
移至下層的選單項目。
移至上層的選單項目。
按下以選擇所選的項目。
2.
3.
4.
5.
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
Using the QUICK MENU
使用快速選單
 QUICK MENU is used to access DVD Camcorder functions by
using the [QUICK MENU] button.
 QUICK MENU provides easier access to frequently used menus
without using the [MENU] button.
Functions available using the QUICK MENU are
as below:
<Camera Mode>
<Player Mode>
<M.Cam Mode>
<M.Player Mode>
1
 使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕即可使用快速選單存取 DVD 攝錄放影
機的各項功能。
 快速選單提供在不使用 [MENU] 按鈕的情況下,更方便存取經常
使用的選單的方法。
STBY SP
DIS
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
Shutter
Exposure
page 60
page 53
page 55
page 57
page 51
page 51
DIS
Off
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
Shutter
Exposure
Delete
Partial Delete
page 67
page 68
Q.MENU Exit
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
page 69
page 71
pages 72~77
White Balance
Photo Quality
Exposure
page 55
page 92
page 51
Delete
Delete All
Protect
Print Mark
Format
page 98
page 99
page 97
page 104
page 100
For example: Setting the White Balance
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
 The quick menu list will appear.
2. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<White Balance>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
3. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
desired mode (Auto, Indoor, Outdoor, or
Custom WB), then press the [Joystick(OK)].
4. To exit, press the [QUICK MENU] button.
3
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
<Camera Mode>
<Player Mode>
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
<M.Cam Mode>
DIS
Program AE
White Balance Outdoor
Digital Effect
Shutter
Exposure
<M.Player Mode>
Q.MENU Exit
4
使用快速選單的可用功能如下:
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
<When the White Balance option in Camera
mode was selected.>
DIS
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
Shutter
Exposure
第 60 頁
第 53 頁
第 55 頁
第 57 頁
第 51 頁
第 51 頁
Delete
Partial Delete
第 67 頁
第 68 頁
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
第 69 頁
第 71 頁
第 72~77 頁
White Balance
Photo Quality
Exposure
第 55 頁
第 92 頁
第 51 頁
Delete
Delete All
Protect
Print Mark
Format
第 98 頁
第 99 頁
第 97 頁
第 104 頁
第 100 頁
例如:設定白平衡(White Balance)
1. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
 快速選單清單將會顯示。
2. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<White Balance>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
3. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的模
式(Auto、Indoor、Outdoor 或 Custom
WB),然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
4. 若要退出請按 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
27
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
OSD (On Screen Display) in Camera Mode/Player Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Battery Level page 23
Manual focus page 52 
EASY.Q page 44 
DIS page 60
Program AE page 53
White Balance Mode page 55
Digital Effects Mode page 57
16:9 Wide page 59
Shutter Speed page 51 
Exposure page 51 
Date/Time page 37
Color Nite pages 48~49 
USB page 110
Remote page 31 (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
Wind Cut page 50
BLC (Back Light Compensation) page 47
LED LIGHT page 49 (SC-DC165 only)
Title scene number
Disc Format page 81
Disc Type
Counter
Remaining Time
Record Mode page 42
Operating Mode
Zoom Position page 45
Digital Zoom Position page 61
PB Zoom page 66 
Message Line page 117
Volume Control page 63
AV IN page 85 (SC-DC165 only)
Playback Speed page 64
相機/播放機模式下的 OSD(螢幕顯示)
OSD in Camera Mode
23
22
1
STBY SP
2
W
T
001
13
12
6
7
Sepia
S.1/60
8
20
12:00 AM JAN.01.2006
2
6
23
11
Color N. 1/30
9
16:9 Wide
W
18
17
16
15
14
No disc!
10
T
OSD in Player Mode
28
24
►► SP 0:00:00
PB ZOOM 2.0x
1
-RW
VR
001
AV IN
25
26
No disc!
10
12:00 AM JAN.01.2006
Notes
Functions not marked with  will be retained when the DVD
Camcorder is powered on after turning it off.
 OSD (On Screen Display) items shown here are based on model
SC-DC163.
27
附註

28
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
3
4
5
電池容量 
第 23 頁
手動對焦 第 52 頁
EASY.Q(簡易拍攝)第 44 頁
3. 數位防手震功能(DIS)第 60 頁
4. 程序自動曝光模式(Program AE)第 53 頁
5. 白平衡模式 第 55 頁
6. 數位效果模式 第 57 頁
16:9 寬螢幕 第 59 頁
7. 快門速度 第 51 頁
8. 曝光 第 51 頁
9. 日期/時間 第 37 頁
10. 色彩夜拍 第 48~49 頁
11. USB 第 110 頁
12. 遙控 第 31 頁(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
13. 消除風聲 第 50 頁
14. BLC(背光補償)第 47 頁
15. LED 燈 第 49 頁(僅限 SC-DC165)
16. 標題場景編號
17. 光碟格式 第 81 頁
18. 光碟類型
19. 計數器
20. 剩餘時間
21. 錄製模式 第 42 頁
22. 操作模式
23. 縮放位置 第 45 頁
數位變焦位置 第 61 頁
24. 播放縮放第 66 頁
25. 訊息行 第 117 頁
26. 音量控制 第 63 頁
27. AV 輸入 第 85 頁(僅限 SC-DC165)
28. 播放速度 第 64 頁
1.
2.
21 20 19


沒有標上  的功能將會在 DVD 攝錄放影機關機後再開機時仍然
保留。
此處所示的 OSD(螢幕顯示)項目基於 SC-DC163 機型。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Preparation
準備工作
OSD (On Screen Display) in M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode
OSD in M.Cam Mode
1. Photo Quality
page 92
2. CARD (Memory
600
Card) Indicator
W
T
8 min
3. Image Counter
(Total number of
No memory card!
recordable photo
1
images)
20
4. Slide Show
page 96
12:00 AM JAN.01.2006
5. Erase Protection
Indicator
page 97
6. Print Mark page 104
7. Folder Number-File Number page 91
File number of the moving image
8. Image Counter (Current Image/Total number of recorded
images)
Turning the OSD (On Screen Display) On/Off
在 M.Cam 模式/M.Player 模式下的 OSD(螢幕顯示)
OSD in M.Player Mode
1. 相片 第 92 頁
3
8
2
4
5/10
3. 影像計數器(可錄製
的靜止影像總數)
Slide
4. 連續放映
第 96 頁
No memory card!
5
6
5
12:00 AM JAN.01.2006
2. 卡(記憶卡)指示器
100-0005
7
SMOV001.AVI
7
7.
資料夾編號-檔案編號 第 91 頁
動態影像的檔案編號
8.
影像計數器(目前影像/錄製影像的總數)
5. 刪除保護指示器
第 97 頁
6. 列印標記
第 104 頁
開啟/關閉 OSD(螢幕顯示)
Turning OSD On/Off
開啟/關閉 OSD
Press the [DISPLAY] button on the left side control panel.
 Each press of the button toggles the OSD function on and off.
按下左控制台上的 [DISPLAY] 按鈕。
 每按一下按鈕即可切換開啟或關閉 OSD 功能。
Turning the Date/Time On/Off
開啟/關閉日期/時間
To turn the Date/Time on or off, access the menu and change the
Date/Time mode. page 37
若要開啟或關閉日期/時間,請存取選單並變更 Date/Time 模式。
第 37 頁
29
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Setting the Clock (Clock Set)
設定時鐘(Clock Set)
 Clock setup works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/
M.Player Mode. page 26
 The date/time is automatically recorded onto a disc. Before
recording, please set the date/time.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
4
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)] or
[
(Player)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joy stick] up or down to select
<Clock Set>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The month will be highlight first.
5
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to set current
month, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The day will be highlighted.
 To adjust the clock, select the Year, Month,
Day, Hour, Min, or AM/PM by pressing the
[Joystick(OK)], then move the [Joystick] up
or down to set respective values.
7. You can set the day, year, hour, minute, and AM/
PM following the same procedure after setting
8
the month.
8. Press the [Joystick(OK)] after setting AM/PM.
 A message <Complete!> is displayed.
9. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
►On
Language
►English
Demonstration ►On
Move OK Select
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
MENU Exit
JAN 01 2006
12 : 00 AM
Adjust OK Select
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
Notes
 After the Lithium Battery loses its charge (after
about 6 months), the date/time appears on the
Move
screen as 12:00 AM JAN.01.2006.
 You can set the year up to 2040.
 If the Lithium Battery is not installed, data inputted will not be backed up.
30
 時鐘設定可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/M.Player
Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 日期/時間自動錄製於光碟中。錄製前請設定日期/時間。
MENU Exit
JAN 01 2006
12 : 00 AM
Complete!
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
(Camera)] 或
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Clock Set>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 將會先反白顯示月份。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以設定目前的月
份,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 將會反白顯示日期。
 若要調整時鐘,請按下 [Joystick(OK)] 以
選擇年、月、日、小時或分鐘,然後向上
或向下移動 [Joystick] 以設定個別的
數值。
7. 您可以依照設定月份的相同程序來設定日
期、年份、小時、分鐘和上午/下午。
8. 設定上午/下午後,按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 一則 <Complete!> 訊息將會顯示。
9. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
附註

鋰電池耗電(大約 6 個月)後,螢幕上的日
期/時間顯示為 12:00 AM JAN.01.2006。
 您最多可以將年份設定為 2040。
若沒有安裝鋰電池,任何輸入資料都將無法備份。
OK Select

MENU Exit
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Setting the Wireless Remote Control Acceptance
(Remote) (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
設定無線遙控器接收(Remote)(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
 The Remote function works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam
Mode/M.Player Mode. page 26
 The Remote function allows you to enable or disable the remote
control for use with the DVD Camcorder.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
4
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Remote>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <On>
or <Off>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 Remote 功能可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/
M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 Remote 功能可以讓您啟用或停用 DVD 攝錄放影機的遙控器。
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Remote
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
►On
►On
►English
►On
Move OK Select
6
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Remote
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
Move
Note
If you set the Remote to Off in the menu and try to use it, the remote
control icon (
) will blink for 3 seconds on the LCD Screen and then
disappear.
MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
(Camera)] 或
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Remote>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On> 或
<Off>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Off
On
OK Select
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
MENU Exit
附註
若您在選單中將 Remote 設定為 Off 並嘗試使用它,LCD 螢幕上的遙
控器圖示(
)將會閃爍 3 秒然後消失。
31
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Setting the Beep Sound (Beep Sound)
設定嗶聲(Beep Sound)
 The Beep Sound function works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/
M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode. page 26
 You can turn the Beep Sound on or off, when on, each press of a
button sounds a beep.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
4
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Beep Sound>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<On> or <Off>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
32
 Beep Sound 功能可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam
Mode/M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以將 Beep Sound 開啟或關閉,開啟時每按一個按鈕就會發
出一次嗶聲。
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
►On
Language
►English
Demonstration ►On
Move OK Select
6
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
Move
MENU Exit
Off
On
OK Select
MENU Exit
1.
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
2.
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
3.
按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4.
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5.
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Beep Sound>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6.
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On> 或
<Off>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
7.
若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
(Camera)] 或
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Setting the Shutter Sound (Shutter Sound)
設定快門聲響(Shutter Sound)
 The Shutter Sound function works only in M.Cam Mode.
page 26
 You can turn the Shutter Sound on or off, when on, with each
press of the [PHOTO] button the Shutter will sound.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Shutter Sound>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<On> or <Off>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 Shutter Sound 功能僅可在 M.Cam Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
您可以將 Shutter Sound 開啟或關閉,開啟時每按一下 [PHOTO]

按鈕,快門將會發出聲響。
M.Cam Mode
►System
Clock Set
►On
Beep Sound
Shutter Sound ►On
►English
Language
Move
6
OK Select
M.Cam Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
Shutter Sound
Language
MENU Exit
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Shutter Sound>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On> 或
<Off>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Off
On
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Move
OK Select
Note
If Beep Sound is set to Off, you will not hear the shutter sound even if
it is set to On.
附註
MENU Exit
如果 Beep Sound 設定為 Off,即使快門聲響設定為 On 您也不會聽
見快門聲響。
33
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Selecting the OSD Language (Language)
選擇 OSD 語言(Language)
 The Language function works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/
M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode. page 26
 You can select the desired language to display the menu screen
and the messages.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4
 Language 功能可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/
M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以選擇所要的選單畫面顯示語言和訊息。
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
►On
Language
►English
Demonstration ►On
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move OK Select
MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
(Camera)] 或
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Language>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 The available language options are listed.
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Language>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 可用的語言選項將會列出。
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the desired OSD
language, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The OSD language is refreshed in the selected language.
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的 OSD 語言,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 OSD 語言將更新為所選的語言。
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
Note
The word Language in the menu is always indicated in English.
選單中的 Language 這個字始終以英文顯示。
34
附註
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: System Menu Setting 起始設定:系統選單設定
Viewing the Demonstration (Demonstration)
觀賞示範畫面(Demonstration)

 The Demonstration function may only be used in the Camera
Mode with no disc inserted in the unit. page 26

 Before you begin: Make sure that there is no disc inserted in the
DVD Camcorder. page 40

 Demonstration automatically shows you the major functions that
are included with your DVD Camcorder so that you may use them
more easily.
4
 The Demonstration operates repeatedly until it
Camera Mode
►System
is switched off.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Camera)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Demonstration>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<On>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. Press the [MENU] button.
 The Demonstration will begin.
8. To quit the Demonstration, press the [MENU]
button.
Note
When you press FADE, BLC, EASY.Q, MF/AF, or
COLOR NITE button during the Demonstration
operation, the Demonstration function will be
deactivated and the function of the button pressed
will be activated.
Demonstration 功能僅限用於 Camera Mode 下,同時攝錄放影
機無插入光碟。第 26 頁
開始使用之前:請確定 DVD 攝錄放影機中並未插入光碟。
第 40 頁
示範畫面將自動顯示 DVD 攝錄放影機中的主要功能,讓您可以更
輕鬆地使用這些功能。
 示範畫面會重複操作直到關閉示範畫面
模式。
Clock Set
Beep Sound
►On
Language
►English
Demonstration ►On
Move OK Select
6
Camera Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
Language
Demonstration
Move
7
MENU Exit
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選
擇 <Demonstration>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<On>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Off
On
OK Select
MENU Exit
SAMSUNG Camcorder is ...
7. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 示範畫面將會開始。
8. 若要結束示範畫面,請按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
附註
[Digital Camcorder]
當您在示範操作時按下 FADE、BLC、EASY.Q、
MF/AF 或 COLOR NITE 按鈕,示範功能將停
用,並且按下按鈕的功能將啟用。
Demonstration
35
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: Display Menu Setting 起始設定:顯示選單設定
Adjusting the LCD Screen (LCD Bright/LCD Color)
 Adjusting the LCD Screen works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/
M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode. page 26
 Your DVD Camcorder is equipped with a 2.5 inches (SC-DC163
only) / 2.7 inches wide (SC-DC164/DC165 only) color Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) Screen, which enables you to view what you
are recording or playing back directly.
 Depending on the conditions under which you are using the DVD
Camcorder (indoors or outdoors for example), you can adjust;
- LCD Bright
- LCD Color
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
4
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Display>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
item you want to adjust (LCD Bright or LCD
Color), then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] left or right to adjust the
value of the selected item (LCD Bright or LCD
Color), then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 You can set values for <LCD Bright> and
<LCD Color> between <00> ~ <35>.
 調整 LCD 螢幕可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/
M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 此 DVD 攝錄放影機具備 2.5 英吋(僅限 SC-DC163)/ 2.7 英吋寬
(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)彩色液晶顯示(LCD)螢幕,可以讓您
檢視錄製的影像或直接播放。
 視您使用此 DVD 攝錄放影機的條件(例如,室內或戶外)而定,
請調整:
- LCD Bright
- LCD Color
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
Camera Mode
►Display
LCD Bright
LCD Color
Date/Time
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
►Off
Move OK Select
6
Camera Mode
►Display
LCD Bright
LCD Color
Date/Time
Move OK Select
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 Adjusting the LCD Screen does not affect the brightness and
color of the image to be recorded.
36
調整 LCD 螢幕(LCD Bright/LCD Color)
(Camera)] 或
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
MENU Exit
15
MENU Exit
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Display>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇要調整的
項目(LCD Bright 或 LCD Color),然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇要調整項
目(LCD Bright 或 LCD Color)的值,然後
按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 您可以將 <LCD Bright> 和 <LCD Color>
設定為 <00> ~ <35> 之間的值。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 調整 LCD 螢幕不會影響要錄製的影像的亮度和色彩 。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Initial Setting: Display Menu Setting 起始設定:顯示選單設定
Displaying the Date/Time (Date/Time)
顯示日期/時間(Date/Time)
 The Date/Time function works in Camera Mode/Player Mode/
M.Cam Mode/M.Player Mode. page 26
 The date and time are automatically recorded on a special data
area of the disc.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
4
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Display>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Date/Time>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
display type of the Date/Time, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 Display type of the Date/Time: <Off>,
<Date>, <Time>, <Date&Time>.
 Date/Time 功能可在 Camera Mode/Player Mode/M.Cam Mode/
M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 日期和時間會自動記錄在光碟的特殊資料區域。
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
Camera Mode
►Display
LCD Bright
LCD Color
Date/Time
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
6
MENU Exit
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Display>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Date/Time>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Camera Mode
►Display
LCD Bright
LCD Color
Date/Time
Move
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
►Off
Move OK Select
(Camera)] 或
Off
Date
Time
Date&Time
OK Select
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇日期/時間
的顯示類型,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 日期/時間的顯示類型: <Off>、<Date>、
<Time>、<Date&Time>。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
MENU Exit
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Notes
 The Date/Time will read 12:00 AM JAN.01.2006 in the following
conditions.
- During playback of a blank section of a disc.
- If the disc was recorded before setting the Date/Time in the
DVD Camcorder.
- When the Lithium Battery becomes weak or dead.
 Before you use the Date/Time function, you must set the clock.
page 30
附註


在下列情況下,日期/時間將顯示為 12:00 AM JAN.01.2006。
- 播放光碟的空白部份。
- 若光碟是在設定 DVD 攝錄放影機的 Date/Time 前錄製。
- 鋰電池電量不足或耗盡。
使用 Date/Time 功能之前,您必須設定時鐘。第 30 頁
37
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前
Using the Viewfinder
使用觀景窗
(Camera)] or [
(Player)] mode, the Viewfinder will
 In the [
work when the LCD Screen is closed.
 在[
(Camera)] 或 [
LCD 螢幕時操作。
Adjusting the Focus
調整焦距
The focus adjustment knob of the Viewfinder enables
individuals with vision problems to see clearer
images.
觀景窗的焦距調整旋鈕可以讓視線有問題的人看到
更清晰的影像。
1. 合上 LCD 螢幕,然後拉出觀景窗。
2. 使用觀景窗的焦距調整旋鈕對焦影像。
1. Close the LCD Screen and pull out the
Viewfinder.
2. Use the Focus Adjustment Knob of the Viewfinder
to focus the picture.
Note
Viewing the sun or any strong light source through the Viewfinder for a
prolonged period may be harmful, or cause temporary impairment.
38
(Player)] 模式下,觀景窗可在合上
附註
長時間透過觀景窗直視太陽或任何強烈光源可能導致傷害,或造成
暫時的損害。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前
Various Recording Techniques
 In some situations, different recording techniques may be required
for more dramatic results.
1. General recording.
1
各種錄製技巧
 在某些情況下可能需要使用不同的錄製技巧,以獲取更加出色的
效果。
2
1. 一般錄製。
2. Downward recording.
Making a recording with a top
view of the LCD Screen.
2. 朝下錄製。
從上方朝下看 LCD 螢幕進行
錄製。
3. Upward recording.
Making a recording viewing the
LCD Screen from below.
3. 朝上錄製。
從下方朝上看 LCD 螢幕進行
錄製。
4. Self recording.
Making a recording viewing the
LCD Screen from the front.
5. Recording with the
Viewfinder.
In circumstances where it is
difficult to use the LCD Screen,
the Viewfinder can be used as
a convenient alternative.
Note
Please rotate the LCD Screen
carefully as excessive rotation
may cause damage to the
inside of the hinge that connects
the LCD Screen to the DVD
Camcorder.
3
4
4. 自拍。
從前方朝前看 LCD 螢幕進行
錄製。
5. 使用觀景窗進行錄製。
在無法使用 LCD 螢幕的情況
下,觀景窗是可提供便利的另
一選擇。
5
附註
請小心旋轉 LCD 螢幕,因為過
度的旋轉可能會導致連接 LCD
螢幕及 DVD 攝錄放影機的鉸鏈
內部損壞。
39
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前
Inserting and Removing a Disc
 When inserting a disc or closing the disc cover, do not
apply excessive force. It may cause a malfunction.
 You cannot open the disc cover while loading.
 Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] and the [Power]
(Camera)] to view menus and
switch to [
messages displayed on the LCD Screen.
插入和取出光碟
 在放入光碟或關閉光碟蓋時,請勿過度用力,否則
可能會導致裝置故障。
 載入光碟時無法開啟光碟蓋。
 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 以及 [Power] 開關為
(Camera)] 以檢視 LCD 螢幕上顯示的選單和
[
訊息。
1
Inserting a Disc
1. Push the [OPEN] switch in the direction of the arrow.
 The disc cover will partially open.
2. Gently open the cover the rest of the way by hand.
3. Push the disc into the disc compartment until a click is
heard.
 The recording side of the disc must face the inside
of the DVD camcorder.
 Do not touch the pickup lens.
4. Gently push the section marked [PUSH CLOSE] on
the disc cover to close it.
 Once inserted, the disc is recognised and the
[ACCESS] indicator blinks. Do not cut off the power
supply during this time. Do not shake nor apply
impact. It may cause a malfunction.
插入光碟
1. 以箭頭所示方向推動 [OPEN] 開關。
 光碟的盒蓋隨即部分打開。
2. 用手輕輕地將盒蓋完全打開。
3. 將光碟推入光碟盒,直至聽到卡嗒聲。
 光碟錄製面應該朝內面向 DVD 攝錄放影機。
 請勿觸碰讀取頭。
4. 輕推光碟盒蓋上標有 [PUSH CLOSE] 的位置以合
上盒蓋。
 插入光碟後,[ACCESS] 指示燈即開始閃爍。
此時切勿切斷電源。 請勿搖動或撞擊機器。否
則可能會導致裝置故障。
3
4
Notes


附註
Move the Hand Strap so it does not interfere with
inserting or ejecting the disc.
The disc cover can be opened when the device is
connected to an AC power adapter or the battery
pack, even if the power is off.
Caution
This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or
adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure. Do not open covers and do not look inside the
product if interlock mechanism is damaged.
Warning
Be careful not to damage the interlock mechanism.
40


請移開手提帶使其不會干擾光碟的插入或退出。
即使電源已關閉,裝置連接交流電電壓器或電池組
時光碟蓋仍可以開啟。
注意
本產品使用雷射。使用本手冊中未說明的控制、調
整或執行步驟可能會導致危險的輻射外洩。 請勿開
啟光碟機蓋並觀看產品內部如果連扣裝置損壞。
pickup lens
警告
小心請勿損壞連扣裝置。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前
When using a New Disc: Formatting a New Disc
Formatting may be required if a new disc is inserted.
Recognition of the disc will start.
For a DVD-R/+R DL disc: Formatting will automatically begin.
For a DVD-RW disc: You are prompted with the <Disc is not formatted.
Format?> message.
Differences
between
Video and VR
mode
Video (Video Mode) : If the disc has been finalized, you will be able to
play the disc on most DVD Players/Recorders.
VR (VR Mode) : You can edit the disc on a DVD Camcorder, but
playback is only possible on a DVD Recorder that supports VR mode.
 Refer to page 12 for Finalized disc compatibility.
使用新 光碟片時:格式化新光碟片
插入新的光碟時可能必須進行格式化。
隨即開始辨識光碟。
DVD-R/+R DL 光碟:格式化會自動開始。
DVD-RW 光碟:一則 <Disc is not formatted. Format?> 訊息顯示。
Video 和
VR 模式
的差別
Video(視訊模式): 如果光碟已終結,您可以在多數 DVD
播放機/錄影機上播放。
VR(視訊錄製模式): 您可以在 DVD 攝錄放影機上編輯光
碟,但僅能在支援視訊錄製模式的 DVD 錄影機上播放光碟。
 有關終結光碟相容性的資訊,請參閱第 12 頁。
向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Video> 或 <VR>,然後按
Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Video> or <VR>, then press
[Joystick(OK)].
[Joystick(OK)]。
 Please refer to page 11 for disc type descriptions and usage.
 請參閱第 11 頁有關模式的應用說明。
 Upon completion, the <Complete!> message will appear.
 完成時,<Complete!> 訊息會顯示。
 If you select <Cancel>, the <Not formatted!> warning message will
 如果您選擇 <Cancel>,<Not formatted!> 警告訊息會顯示。
appear. Formatting a new disc is required to record
新光碟錄製前必須先格式化。若要稍後再進行格式
SP
on it. To format later, use the <Disc Manager> menu.
化,請使用 <Disc Manager> 選單。第 81 頁
page 81
DVD+RW 光碟:一則 <Disc format? All files will
For a DVD+RW disc: You are prompted with the <Disc
Disc is not formatted.
be deleted!> 訊息會顯示。
format? All files will be deleted!> message.
Format?
向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,然後按
Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>, then
Cancel
VR
Video
press [Joystick(OK)].
[Joystick(OK)]。
 Upon completion the <Complete!> message will appear.
 完成時,<Complete!> 訊息會顯示。
 If you select <No>, the <Not formatted!> warning
 如果您選擇 <No>,<Not formatted!> 警告訊息會顯
message will appear. Formatting a new disc is
示。新光碟錄製前必須先格式化。若要稍後再進行
required to record on it. To format later, use the <Disc <When a DVD-RW disc is formatted.>
格式化,請使用 <Disc Manager> 選單。第 81 頁
Manager> menu. page 81
取出光碟
Removing a Disc
1. 以箭頭所示方向推動 [OPEN] 開關。
1. Push the [OPEN] switch in the direction of the arrow.
 光碟的盒蓋隨即部分打開。
 The disc cover will partially open.
2. 用手輕輕地將盒蓋完全打開。
2. Gently open the cover the rest of the way by hand.
3. 取出光碟。
3. Remove the disc.
 While pushing down the center portion of the turntable, pick up the
 壓下轉盤中央部位的同時,手握光碟邊緣向上提取出光碟。
disc by the edges to remove.
4. 輕推光碟盒蓋上標有 [PUSH CLOSE] 的位置以合上盒蓋。
4. Gently push the section marked [PUSH CLOSE] on the disc cover to close it.
附註
Note
或
時,格式化/終結功能將無法使用。
The Finalize/Format functions are not available at battery level
and
. 電池電量處於
41
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Before Recording DVD 攝錄放影機:錄製前
Selecting the Record Mode (Rec Mode)
選擇錄製模式(Rec Mode)
 The Record Mode function works in both Camera Mode and
Player Mode. page 26
 This DVD Camcorder can film in the XP (extra play), the SP
(standard play) and the LP (long play) modes.
The SP mode is set as the factory default.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)] or
[
(Player)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Record>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Rec Mode>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
desired record mode (XP, SP or LP), then
press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 The icon of the selected mode is displayed.
4
 錄製模式功能可在 Camera Mode 和 Player Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 DVD 攝錄放影機可以 XP(特別播放)、SP(標準播放)和
LP(長時間播放)模式拍攝。
SP 模式為機器出廠時預設的模式。
Camera Mode
►Record
Rec Mode
Wind Cut
Move
6
►SP
►Off
OK Select
Camera Mode
►Record
Rec Mode
Wind Cut
Recording Times based on Disc Type
XP
*SP
*LP
DVD-RW/+RW/-R (1.4G)
Approx. 20min
Approx. 30min
Approx. 60min
DVD+R DL (2.6G)
Approx. 35min
Approx. 53min
Approx.106min
* Recorded files are encoded with Variable Bit
Rate (VBR).
 The recording times shown above are
approximate and depend on the recording
environment (i.e. lighting conditions).
 VBR is an encoding system that automatically
adjusts the bit rate according to the recording
image.
42
MENU Exit
XP
SP
LP
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)] 或
[
(Player)]。
3. 按下 [MENU]按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Record>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Rec Mode>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要
的錄製模式(XP、SP 或 LP)然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選定模式的圖示將會顯示。
錄製時間以光碟類型為準
Move
7
OK Select
STBY XP
MENU Exit
0:00:00 -RW
20 min VR
XP
*SP
*LP
DVD-RW/+RW/-R
(1.4G)
約 20 分鐘
約 30 分鐘
約 60 分鐘
DVD+R DL
(2.6G)
約 35 分鐘
約 53 分鐘
約 106 分鐘
*錄製的檔案以可變位元速率 (VBR) 編碼。
 以上所示的錄製時間為大約值,並且取決於
錄製環境(例如照明情況)。
 VBR 是一種編碼系統,可根據錄製影像自動
調整位元速率。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
Making your First Recording
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect a power source to the DVD
1
Camcorder. pages 21, 25
 (A Battery Pack or a AC Power
adapter)
 Insert a disc. page 40
Remove the Lens Cover.
Open the LCD Screen.
 Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
 Set the [Power] switch to
[
(Camera)].
Make sure that <STBY> is
displayed.
4 5
 Make sure the image you want
to record appears on the LCD
Screen or Viewfinder.
 Make sure the Battery Level
indicates that there is enough
remaining power for your expected
recording time.
To start recording, press the [Start/Stop] button.
 <REC> is displayed on the LCD Screen.
The record mode, recording time, the disc type,
the format mode, and the title scene number are
displayed on the LCD Screen.
To stop recording, press the [Start/Stop] button again.
 <STBY> is displayed on the LCD screen after blinking.
 If you press the [Start/Stop] button to record again, a
new title scene will be created.
The title scene number will not appear in the STBY
mode but in the REC mode.
進行您的第一次錄製
REC  SP 0:00:20 -RW
30 min VR
001
Notes




1. 將電源連接到 DVD 攝錄放影機。
 第 21,25 頁
 (電池組或交流電源適配器)
 插入光碟。 第 40 頁
2. 取下透鏡蓋。
3. 打開 LCD 螢幕。
 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
 設定 [Power] 開關為
[
(Camera)]。
確定 <STBY> 顯示。
3
 確定您要錄製的影像出現在 LCD
螢幕或觀景窗上。
 確定電池電量表示尚有足夠的剩
餘電量可供預計錄製時間使用。
4. 若要開始錄製,請按 [Start/Stop]
按鈕。
 <REC> 會顯示於 LCD 螢幕
上。錄製模式、錄製時間、光碟
類型、格式化模式和標題編號會
顯示在 LCD 螢幕上。
5. 若要停止錄製,請再次按 [Start/Stop] 按鈕。
 <STBY> 閃爍後顯示於 LCD 螢幕上。
 如果按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕再次開始錄製,新的
標題清單將被建立。
標題清單號不會顯示在待機模式,而會顯示在錄
製模式下。
2
Playing title scenes. page 63
Up to 253 title scenes can be created on DVD-R/+RW/+R DL/-RW(Video
Mode)discs, and up to 999 on DVD-RW(VR Mode).
Detach the Battery Pack when you have finished recording to prevent
unnecessary battery power consumption.
If the power cable/batteries are disconnected, or recording is disabled during
recording, an error message will appear and the system is switched to the data
recovery mode. While data is being recovered, no other function is enabled. After
data recovery, the system will be switched to the STBY mode.
附註




播放標題場景。  第 63 頁
可在 DVD-R/+RW/+R DL/-RW(Video Mode) 光碟中建立多達 253 個標
題場景,而 DVD-RW(VR Mode) 則多達 999 個。
在您完成錄製時取出電池組,以避免不必要的電池耗電。
如果拔下電源線或電池,或者錄製時中途取消,一則錯誤訊息會顯示
並且系統會切換為資料還原模式。資料還原進行時,無法使用其他功
能。 資料還原後,系統會切換至待機模式。
43
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
Recording with Ease for Beginners (EASY.Q Mode)
初學者的輕鬆錄製方式(EASY.Q Mode)
 The EASY.Q function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 The EASY.Q function allows a beginner to easily make good
recordings.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
3. By pressing the [EASY.Q] button, all functions
on the DVD Camcorder will be set to off and the
recording settings will be set to the following
basic modes (DIS, AF(Auto Focus), AWB(Auto
White Balance), AE(Auto Exposure)) ON:
) appear
 The word <EASY.Q> and DIS (
on the display at the same time.
4. Press the [Start/Stop] button to start recording.
 Recording will begin using the basic
automatic settings.
5. Press the [EASY.Q] button again in the STBY
mode to turn the EASY.Q mode off.
 The EASY.Q function will not turn off while
you are recording.
 The DVD Camcorder will return to the
settings that were set prior to activating
EASY.Q mode.
Notes




 EASY.Q(簡易拍攝)功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 EASY.Q(簡易拍攝)功能可讓初學者輕鬆地進行完美錄製。
3
3
STBY SP
附註
4
In EASY.Q mode, certain functions are not
available, such as Menu, BLC, Manual focus,
Color Nite. If you want to use these functions,
you must first turn the EASY.Q mode off.
The EASY.Q mode settings are released when
the Battery Pack is removed from the DVD
Camcorder and must be reset when the Battery
Pack is replaced.
16:9 Wide is not available in the EASY.Q mode. (SC-DC163 only)
Digital Effect and Digital Zoom is not available in the EASY.Q mode.
44
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [EASY.Q] 按鈕,DVD 攝錄放影機上的
所有功能都會關閉,錄製設定會設為下列基本
模式 (DIS、AF(自動對焦)、AWB(自動
白平衡)、AE(自動曝光))為 ON:
 <EASY.Q> 和 DIS(
)同時顯示在螢幕
上。
4. 按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕開始錄製。
 錄製將使用基本的自動設定開始進行。
5. 再次在待機模式中按 [EASY.Q] 按鈕,然後關
閉簡易拍攝模式。
 當您正在錄製時,簡易拍攝功能不會關閉。
 DVD 攝錄放影機會返回到 EASY.Q 模式前
的設定。

 在簡易拍攝模式中,特定功能無法使用,如選
單、背光補償(BLC)、手動對焦、色彩夜拍。
若您要使用這些功能,您必須先關閉簡易拍攝
模式。
 當從 DVD 攝錄放影機取下電池組時,簡易拍攝
模式設定將取消,並且必須在電池組再次裝上
時重新設定。
 16:9 Wide 不可在 EASY.Q 模式下使用。
(僅限 SC-DC163)
Digital Effect 和 Digital Zoom 無法在簡易拍攝模式中使用。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
Using External Microphone
外接式麥克風
Connect external microphone (not supplied) to the
external microphone jack of this DVD Camcorder.
Clearer sound can be recorded.
連接外接麥克風(未提供)至 DVD 攝錄放影機的外
接式麥克風插孔。可錄製更清晰的聲音。
Zooming In and Out
放大和縮小
 The Zoom function works in both Camera Mode and M.Cam
Mode. page 26
 Zooming is a recording technique that lets you change the size of
the subject in a scene.
 You can zoom using variable zoom speeds.
 Use these features for different shots. Please note that over-use of
the Zoom feature can lead to unprofessional looking results and a
reduction of battery usage time.
1. Move the [Zoom] lever slightly
for a gradual zoom, move it
further for a high-speed zoom.
 Your zooming is monitored
on the OSD.
2. [T] (Telephoto) side: Subject
appears closer.
3. [W] (Wide angle) side: Subject appears farther away.
 You can record a subject that is about 10mm (about 0.5 inch)
away from the lens surface in the Wide position.
 縮放功能可在 Camera Mode 和 M.Cam Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 縮放是讓您變更場景中主體大小的錄製技巧。
 您可以使用不同的縮放速度來進行縮放。
 針對不同的拍攝使用這些功能。請留意過度使用縮放功能可能導
致不夠專業的視覺效果,並縮短電池使用時間。
TELE
WIDE
1. 稍微移動 [Zoom] 桿以漸次縮
放,增大移動幅度則可進行高
速縮放。
 可在 OSD 上監控縮放。
2. [T](望遠)側:主體顯得較近。
3. [W](廣角)側:主體顯得較遠。
 廣角位置可錄製大約距透鏡
表面10 公釐(大約 0.5 英
吋)的主體。
45
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
Using the Fade In and Out (FADE)
 The Fade function works only in
Camera Mode. page 26
 You can give your recording a
professional look by using special
effects such as fade in at the
beginning of a sequence or fade
out at the end of a sequence.
To Start Recording
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to
[
(Camera)].
3. Before recording, hold down the
[FADE] button.
 The picture and sound gradually
disappear (fade out).
4. Press the [Start/Stop] button
and at the same time release the
[FADE] button.
 Recording starts and the picture and
sound gradually appear (fade in).
使用淡入和淡出(FADE)
3
4
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
 淡化功能僅可在 Camera Mode 下操
作。第 26 頁
 透過使用特殊效果,您可使您的錄製
看起來更專業,如在錄製順序開始時
使用淡入或在順序結束時使用淡出。
REC  SP
0:00:20 -RW
30 min VR
001
開始錄製

5
REC  SP

6
5. When you wish to stop recording,
hold down the [FADE] button.
 The picture and sound gradually
disappear (fade out).
6. When the picture has Hold down the [FADE] button
disappeared, press
the [Start/Stop]
button to stop
recording.
a. Fade Out (Approx.
4 seconds)
46
STBY SP

Gradual appearance

a. Fade Out
b. Fade In
0:00:30 -RW
30 min VR
001
STBY SP
To Stop Recording
b. Fade In (Approx.
4 seconds)
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
0:00:40 -RW
30 min VR
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 在錄製前,按住 [FADE] 按鈕。
 畫面和音效漸漸消失(淡出)。
4. 按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕,同時釋放
[FADE] 按鈕。
 錄製開始,畫面及音效漸漸出現
(淡入)。
停止錄製
5. 當您希望停止錄製時,請按住
[FADE] 按鈕。
 畫面和音效漸漸消失(淡出)。
6. 在畫面消失後,按 [Start/Stop] 按鈕
以停止錄製。
Gradual disappearance
a. 淡出(大約 4 秒鐘)
Release the [FADE] button
b. 淡入(大約 4 秒鐘)
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
Using Back Light Compensation Mode (BLC)
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
使用背光補償模式(BLC)
 BLC works in both Camera Mode
and M.Cam Mode. page 26
 Back lighting exists when the subject
is darker than the background:
- The subject is in front of a
window.
- The person to be recorded is
wearing white or shiny clothes
and is placed against a bright
<BLC Off>
background; the person’s face is
too dark to distinguish his/her features.
- The subject is outdoors and the background is overcast.
- The light sources are too bright.
- The subject is against a snowy background.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
 背光補償模式(BLC)可在 Camera
Mode 和 M.Cam Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 背光情形發生在主體比背景暗時:
- 主體位於窗前。
- 錄製的人物穿著白色或亮色服飾,
並處於明亮的背景中, 該人物的
臉龐將顯得太暗而無法辨別其五
官。
- 主體在戶外,而背景陰暗。
- 光源太亮。
- 主體處於雪景中。
<BLC On>
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
3
(Camera)].
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. Press the [BLC] button.
) is displayed.
 BLC icon (
3. 按下 [BLC] 按鈕。
 背光補償圖示 (
4. To exit BLC mode, press the [BLC] button
again.
 Each press of the [BLC] button toggles:
Normal  BLC  Normal.
4. 要結束背光補償模式,請再次按 [BLC] 按鈕。
 每次當您按 [BLC] 按鈕將切換:
正常  背光補償  正常。
Note
The BLC function will not operate in EASY.Q mode.
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
) 會顯示。
附註
BLC 功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下操作。
47
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
Using the Color Nite
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
使用 Color Nite(色彩夜拍)
 Color Nite function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 You can make the subject recorded appear to be in slow motion
by controlling the shutter speed, or a brighter image in dark places
without a compromise in colors.
 Please disable 16:9 Wide mode to use the
3
Color Nite function. page 59
 色彩夜拍功能僅可在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 透過控制快門速度或使暗地方的影像變亮,您可以用慢動作的方
式拍攝物體,並且不會降低色彩。
 請停用 16:9 Wide 模式以使用 Color Nite
(彩色夜拍)功能。第 59 頁
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
3. Press the [COLOR NITE] (SC-DC163/DC164
only) or [C.NITE/LED LIGHT] (SC-DC165 only)
button.
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
4. Each time you press the [COLOR NITE] (SCDC163/DC164 only) or [C.NITE/LED LIGHT]
(SC-DC165 only) button, shutter speed is
changed to;
 <Color N. 1/30>, <Color N. 1/15> and off.
(SC-DC163/DC164 only)
 <Color N. 1/30>, <Color N. 1/15>, <Color N.
1/15(
)> and off. (SC-DC165 only)
Notes
 When using Color Nite, the image takes on a
slow motion like effect.
 When using Color Nite, the focus adjusts slowly
and white dots may appear on the screen, this
is not a defect.
 Program AE, Digital Zoom, Shutter,
Exposure, Mosaic, Mirror, Emboss2, Pastel2
or 16:9 Wide is not available in the Color Nite
mode.
 If DIS or EASY.Q is set, Color Nite mode will
be released.
48
<SC-DC163/DC164 only>
3
<SC-DC165 only>
4
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
Color N.1/30
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [COLOR NITE](僅限 SC-DC163/
DC164)或 [C.NITE/LED LIGHT](僅限 SCDC165)按鈕。
4. 每次按下 [COLOR NITE](僅限 SC-DC163/
DC164)或 [C.NITE/LED LIGHT](僅限 SCDC165)按鈕,快門速度會變更為:
 <Color N. 1/30>、<Color N. 1/15> 和
關閉。(僅限 SC-DC163/DC164)
 <Color N. 1/30>、<Color N. 1/15>、
<Color N. 1/15 ( )> 和關閉。
(僅限 SC-DC165)
附註
 使用色彩夜拍時,所錄製的影像將具有類似慢
動作的效果。
 使用色彩夜拍功能時,對焦調整將變得緩慢,
同時可能有白點出現在螢幕上,這不是故障所
造成。
 色彩夜拍模式無法使用 Program AE、Digital
Zoom、Shutter、Exposure、Mosaic、
Mirror、Emboss2、Pastel2 或 16:9 Wide。
 若設定了數位防手震或簡易拍攝,色彩夜拍模
式將被解除。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Basic Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:基本錄製
Using the LED LIGHT (SC-DC165 only)
使用 LED 燈(僅限 SC-DC165)
 The LED LIGHT function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 The LED LIGHT enables you to record a subject in dark places.
 The LED LIGHT can be used with Color Nite function only.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
 LED 燈功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 LED 燈讓您可在主題昏暗時進行錄製。
 LED 僅可和色彩夜拍功能一起使用。
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
3
(Camera)].
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. Press the [C.NITE/LED LIGHT] button until
<Color N. 1/15(
)> appears.
3. 按住 [C.NITE/LED LIGHT] 按鈕直到
<Color N. 1/15( )> 顯示。
Danger
 The LED LIGHT can become extremely hot.
 Do not touch it while in operation or soon after
turning it off, otherwise serious injury may result.
 Do not place the DVD Camcorder into the
carrying case immediately after using the LED
LIGHT, since it remains extremely hot for some
time.
 Do not use near flammable or explosive
materials.
危險
 LED 燈光會變得非常燙。
 請勿在操作時或熄滅後馬上觸摸它,否則可能
導致嚴重受傷。
 請勿在使用 LED 燈後立刻將 DVD 攝錄放影機
放入攜帶套中,因為它的熱度仍會持續一段時
間。
 請勿靠近易燃性或爆炸性材料。
Note
The range of the LED LIGHT is limited.
(up to 6.6ft (2m))
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
Color N.1/15
附註
LED 燈的照射範圍有限。
(最遠 6.6 英呎(2 公尺))
49
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Cutting Off Wind Noise (Wind Cut)
風聲消減(Wind Cut)

 The Wind Cut function works only in Camera Mode. page 26

 Use the Wind Cut when recording in windy places such as the

beach or near buildings.
 The Wind Cut function minimizes wind noise or other noise while
recording.
- When the Wind Cut is on, some low pitched
4
tones are eliminated along with the sound
Camera Mode
of the wind.
►Record
Rec Mode
Wind Cut
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
►SP
►Off
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Camera)].
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
3. Press the [MENU] button.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Record>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move
6
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Wind Cut>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. To activate the Wind Cut function, move the
[Joystick] up or down to select <On>, then
press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
) is displayed.
 Wind Cut icon (
Note
Make sure Wind Cut is set to Off when you want
the microphone to be as sensitive as possible.
50
Wind Cut 功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下使用。第 26 頁
在沙灘或靠近建築物等風大的地方錄製時使用風聲消減功能。
風聲消減功能可在錄製時減低風聲或其他噪音。
- 開啟風聲消減時,一些低沉音調將和風聲一起被消除。
Camera Mode
►Record
Rec Mode
Wind Cut
Move
7
OK Select
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Remote>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Wind Cut>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Off
On
OK Select
STBY SP
MENU Exit
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
6. 要啟動風聲消減功能,向上或向下移
動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
MENU Exit
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
)會顯示。
 風聲消減圖示(
附註
若希望 Wind Cut 的收音能儘量敏感,請確定將
風聲消減設定為 Off。
ENGLISH
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
Setting the Shutter Speed & Exposure (Shutter/Exposure)
臺 灣
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
設定快門速度和曝光(Shutter/Exposure)
The Shutter Speed function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 快門速度功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下使用。第 26 頁
The Exposure function works in both Camera Mode and M.Cam Mode. page 26  曝光功能可在 Camera Mode 和 M.Cam Mode 下使用。第 26 頁
The Shutter Speed and Exposure functions can be set
 可在快速選單中設定快門速度和曝光功能。
3
STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW
in the QUICK MENU.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
30 min VR
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
DIS
Off
(Camera)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
3. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
Program AE
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
 快速選單將會顯示。
White Balance
 QUICK MENU list will appear.
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Shutter> 或
Digital Effect
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Shutter> or
Shutter
<Exposure>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
<Exposure>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Exposure
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Manual>,
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Manual>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Q.MENU Exit
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的快門速度
6. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select the desired
shutter speed or exposure value, then press the
或曝光值,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5
STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW
[Joystick(OK)].
 快門速度可設定為 <1/60>、
30 min VR
 Shutter speed can be set to <1/60>, <1/100>,
<1/100>、<1/250>、<1/500>、<1/1000>、
DIS
<1/250>, <1/500>, <1/1000>, <1/2000>, <1/4000>
<1/2000>、<1/4000> 或 <1/10000>。
Program AE
or <1/10000>.
 曝光值可設定在 <00> 和 <29> 之間。
White Balance
 Exposure value can be set between <00> and <29>.
Digital Effect
7. 若要退出請按 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
7. To exit, press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Shutter
Manual
 選擇的設定會顯示。
 Selected settings are displayed.
Exposure
錄製時建議使用的快門速度
Recommended Shutter Speeds When Recording
Q.MENU Exit

高爾夫或網球等戶外運動:1/2000 或 1/4000
 Outdoor sports such as golf or tennis: 1/2000 or 1/4000
 移動的汽車或火車或其他快速移動的車子,如雲霄
 Moving cars or trains or other rapidly moving vehicles
飛車:1/1000、1/500 或 1/250
such as roller coasters: 1/1000, 1/500 or 1/250
6
 籃球等室內運動: 1/100
 Indoor sports such as basketball: 1/100
S.1/60
Adjusting the Exposure When Recording
在錄製時調整曝光
 如果將 曝光設定為手動,預設值將顯示為根據環
 If you set Exposure to Manual, the default setting
appears as the value adjusted automatically for changes
境照明情況變化而自動調整的值。 您也可以使用
according to the environmental light conditions. You can
Joystick 調整亮度。
also adjust the brightness using the Joystick.
20
附註
Notes
 若您在選擇了 Program AE 選項時手動變更快門速
 If you manually change the Shutter Speed and the Exposure
度和曝光值,手動變更將被首先套用。
value when Program AE option is selected, manual changes are applied first.

快門速度設定太高時,影像可能顯得較不柔和。
 The image may not seem as smooth when a high Shutter Speed is set.
 DVD 攝錄放影機將在您變更至 EASY.Q 模式時返回自動快門和自動曝光
 The DVD Camcorder returns to the auto shutter and auto exposure settings
when you change to the EASY.Q mode.
設定。
 When recording with a Shutter Speed of 1/1000 or higher, make sure the sun is
 以 1/1000 或以上的快門速度進行錄製時,請確定陽光未照射進透鏡內。
not shining into the lens.



51
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Auto Focus / Manual Focus
 The Auto Focus/Manual Focus function
works in both Camera Mode and
M.Cam Mode. page 26
 In most situations, it is better to use the
automatic focus feature, as it enables
you to concentrate on the creative side
of your recording.
 Manual focusing may be necessary
under certain conditions that make
automatic focusing difficult or unreliable.
自動對焦/手動對焦
a
b
c
d
 自動對焦/手動對焦功能可在 Camera
Mode 和 M.Cam Mode下操作。第 26 頁
 在大多數情況下,使用自動對焦功能更為
恰當,因為它能讓您專注於錄製時的創意
發揮。
 當在特定條件下無法進行自動對焦和/或
自動對焦變得不可靠時,可能就需要使
用手動對焦。
自動對焦
Auto Focus
 若您沒有使用 DVD 攝錄放影機的經驗,
我們建議您利用自動對焦功能。
 If you are inexperienced in the use of
DVD Camcorders, we recommend that
you use Auto Focus.
手動對焦
Manual Focus
 In the following situations, you may obtain better
results by adjusting the focus manually.
a. A picture containing several objects, some close
to the DVD Camcorder, others further away.
b. A person enveloped in fog or surrounded by snow.
c. Very shiny or glossy surfaces like a car.
d. People or objects moving constantly or
quickly like an athlete or a crowd.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MF/AF] button.
 The manual focus icon ( ) will blink.
4. Focus with the [VOL-] and [VOL+] buttons.
 Pressing the [VOL-] button will focus on the
foreground image while pressing the [VOL+]
button will focus on the background image.
5. To exit, press the [MF/AF] button.
Note
Manual Focus is not available in the EASY.Q mode.
52
3 4
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Near
Far
 在下列情況下,使用手動對焦可讓您獲
得更佳效果。
a. 拍攝圖片包含數個物體,各與 DVD
攝錄放影機有不同距離。
b. 被霧包圍或雪景中的人物。
c. 非常光亮的表面,如汽車。
d. 持續或快速移動的人或物體,如運動
員或人群。
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
按下 [MF/AF] 按鈕。
 手動對焦圖示( )會閃爍。
使用 [VOL-] 和 [VOL+] 進行對焦。
 按下 [VOL-] 按鈕會對焦於前景的影像;
按下 [VOL+] 按鈕會對焦於背景的影像。
要退出,按下 [MF/AF] 按鈕。
附註
手動對焦不可在簡易拍攝模式中使用。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Programmed Automatic Exposure Modes (Program AE)
 The Program AE function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 The Program AE mode allows you to adjust shutter speeds and
apertures to suit different recording conditions.
 They give you creative control over the depth of field.




<Auto ( )> mode
- Auto balance between the subject and the
background.
- To be used in normal conditions.
- The shutter speed automatically varies from
1/60 to 1/250 per second, depending on the
scene.
)> mode
<Sports (
For recording people or objects moving quickly.
程序自動曝光模式 (Program AE)
 Program AE 功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 Program AE 模式允許您根據不同的錄製條件來調整快門速度和
光圈。
 它們使您可對景深進行具創意的控制。
STBY SP
)> mode
<Portrait (
- For focusing on the background of the subject, when the
background is out of focus.
- The Portrait mode is most effective when used outdoors.
- The shutter speed automatically varies from 1/60 to 1/1000 per
second.
)> mode
<Spotlight (
For recording correctly when there is only light on the subject and
not the rest of the picture.

)> mode
<Sand/Snow (
For recording when people or objects are darker than the
background because of reflected light from sand or snow.

<High Speed ( )> (High Shutter Speed) mode
For recording fast-moving subjects such as players in golf or tennis
games.
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
)> 模式
 <Auto(
- 自動平衡主體和背景。
- 在正常情況下使用。
- 快門速度在每秒 1/60 到 1/250 的範圍內自動
變換,視場景而定。
)> 模式
 <Sports(
用於錄製快速移動的人或物體。
)> 模式
 <Portrait(
- 當主體背景失焦時,對背景進行對焦。
- 人像模式在戶外使用時最有效。
- 快門速度可在每秒 1/60 到 1/1000 的範圍內自
動變換。
)> 模式
 <Spotlight(
在除了主體,畫面中其他地方都沒有燈光時,進行正確錄製。
)> 模式
 <Sand/Snow(
在由於沙灘或雪地的光線反射,造成人物或物體比背景暗時進行錄製。
)>(High Shutter Speed)模式
 <High Speed(
用於錄製快速移動的主體,如高爾夫或網球比賽中的選手。
53
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Setting the Program AE
設定程序自動曝光
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Program AE>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The available options are listed.
Move
6
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
desired program AE option, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 The icon of the selected mode is displayed.
 When the <Auto> mode is selected, no
icon is displayed.
Notes
 You can directly access the Program AE
function by using the [QUICK MENU] button.
page 27
 The Program AE function will not operate in
EASY.Q mode
54
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
OK Select
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
7
►Auto
►Auto
►Off
►Off
►Off
►Off
(Camera)]。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Camera>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Program AE>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 可用的選項將會列出。
A
Auto
Sports
Portrait
Spotlight
Sand/Snow
High Speed
OK Select
STBY SP
MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
MENU Exit
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的程
序自動曝光選項,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選定模式的圖示將會顯示。
 當選擇了 <Auto> 模式時,將不會顯示任何
圖示。
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
附註
若想要直接使用 Program AE
功能,只要使用 [QUICK MENU] 即可。
第 27 頁
 Program AE 功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下
操作。

ENGLISH
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
Setting the White Balance (White Balance)
臺 灣
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
設定白平衡(White Balance)
 White Balance 功能可在Camera Mode 和 M.Cam Mode
 The White Balance function works in both Camera Mode and
下操作。 第 26 頁
M.Cam Mode. page 26
 White Balance 是在任何錄製條件下保留物體獨特影像顏色的
 The White Balance is a recording function that preserves the
錄製功能。
unique image color of the subject in any recording condition.
 You may select the appropriate White Balance
 您可選擇適當的白平衡模式以取得品質優良
4
mode to obtain good quality image color.
的影像顏色。
Camera Mode
): This mode is generally used to
 Auto (
 Auto( ):此模式一般用來自動控制白平衡。
►Camera
control the White Balance automatically.
 Indoor( ):這將根據室內環境控制白平衡。
Program AE
►Auto
): This controls the White
 Indoor (
White Balance ►Auto
- 在鹵光燈或影棚/錄影燈光下
Balance according to indoor ambience.
Digital Effect
►Off
- 主體顏色突出
16:9 Wide
►Off
- Under halogen or studio/video lighting
- 特寫
DIS
►Off
- Subject is of one dominant color
 Outdoor( ):這將根據戶外環境控制白
Digital Zoom
►Off
- Close up
平衡。
Move OK Select MENU Exit
): This controls the White
 Outdoor (
- 在陽光下,特別是為顏色突出的主體拍攝特
Balance according to the outdoor ambience.
寫時。
- In daylight, especially for close up and
6
Camera Mode
 Custom WB( ):這將根據錄製環境控制
where the subject is of one dominant color.
►Camera
白平衡。
): This controls the
 Custom WB (
Program AE
White Balance according to the recording
A
Auto
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
White Balance
environment.
Indoor
Digital Effect
(Camera)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
Outdoor
16:9 Wide
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
Custom WB
DIS
(Camera)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
 選單清單將會顯示。
Digital Zoom
3. Press the [MENU] button.
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
Move OK Select MENU Exit
 The menu list will appear.
<Camera>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
7
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW
<White Balance>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
30 min VR
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的模
select <White Balance>, then press the
式(Auto、 Indoor、Outdoor、
[Joystick(OK)].
Custom WB),然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
 請參閱第 56 頁瞭解有關設定自訂白平衡
desired mode (Auto, Indoor, Outdoor or
的詳情。
Custom WB), then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 Refer to page 56 for details on setting
Custom WB.
 選定模式的圖示將會顯示。
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 選擇 <Auto> 模式時,將不會顯示任何
 The icon of the selected mode is displayed.
圖示。
 When the <Auto> mode is selected, no icon is displayed.
55
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Setting the Custom White Balance
設定自訂白平衡
 You can adjust the white balance as you wish based on the
recording environment.
 您可以根據錄製環境調整您要的白平衡。
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
(Camera)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <White Balance>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Custom WB>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The <Set White Balance> will blink.
7. Place the subject under the desired lighting,
then press the [Joystick(OK)] button.
 The <Set White Balance> will disappear
and the white balance setting will
commence.
8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
) is displayed.
 Custom WB icon (
6
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
OK Select
MENU Exit
Set White Balance
MENU Exit
OK Select
8
Notes
 You can directly access the White Balance
function by using the [QUICK MENU] button.
page 27
 The White Balance function will not operate in
EASY.Q mode.
 Turn the Digital Zoom off (if necessary) to set
a more accurate white balance.
 Reset the white balance if lighting conditions change.
 During normal outdoor recording, setting to Auto may provide
better results.
56
A
Auto
Indoor
Outdoor
Custom WB
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
(Camera)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Camera>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<White Balance>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 選擇
<Custom WB>,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Set White Balance> 會閃爍。
7. 將白色物體置於所要的燈光下,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)] 按鈕。
 <Set White Balance> 會消失,白平衡設定
開始。
8. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 自訂白平衡圖示( ) 會顯示。
附註





您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取
White Balance 功能。 第 27 頁
White Balance 功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下
操作。
關閉 Digital Zoom(如有必要)以設定更準
確的白平衡。
光線條件變更時,請重設白平衡。
普通戶外錄製時,設定為自動可提供更佳
效果。
ENGLISH
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
Applying Digital Effects (Digital Effect)
 The Digital Effect function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 The Digital Effects enable you to give a creative look to your
recording.
 Select the appropriate Digital Effect for the type of picture that you
wish to record and the effect you wish to create.
 There are 10 Digital Effect modes.
1. <Art> mode
1
This mode gives the images a coarse effect.
2. <Mosaic> mode
This mode gives the images a mosaic
effect.
3. <Sepia> mode
This mode gives the images a reddish3
brown pigment.
4. <Negative> mode
This mode reverses the colors, creating a
negative image.
5. <Mirror> mode
This mode cuts the picture in half, using a
5
mirror effect.
6. <BLK & WHT> mode
This mode changes the images to black
and white.
7. <Emboss1> mode
This mode creates a 3D effect
7
(embossing).
8. <Emboss2> mode
This mode creates a 3D effect
(embossing) on the surrounding area of
an image.
9
9. <Pastel1> mode
This mode applies a pale pastel drawing
effect to an image.
10. <Pastel2> mode
This mode applies a pale pastel drawing
effect to surrounding area of an image.
臺 灣
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
套用數位效果(Digital Effect)
 Digital Effect 功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 數位效果讓您可以在錄製值時加入創意元素。
 為您要錄製的影片類型以及您要建立的效果選擇適當的數位
效果。
 共有 10 種數位效果模式。
2
1. <Art> 模式
此模式可賦予影像粗糙效果。
2. <Mosaic> 模式
此模式可賦予影像馬賽克效果。
4
3. <Sepia> 模式
此模式可賦予影像紅褐色的色調。
4. <Negative> 模式
此模式把顏色倒置,建立一張底片影像。
6
5. <Mirror> 模式
此模式使用鏡像效果,將圖片剪切一半。
6. <BLK & WHT> 模式
此模式將影像變更為黑白。
7. <Emboss1> 模式
此模式將建立 3D 效果(浮雕)。
8
10
8. <Emboss2> 模式
此模式在影像周圍區域建立 3D 效果
(浮雕)。
9. <Pastel1> 模式
此模式將 淡淡的蠟筆繪畫效果套用到影
像上。
10. <Pastel2> 模式
此模式將淡淡的蠟筆繪畫效果套用到影像
的周圍區域上。
57
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Selecting the Digital Effects
選擇數位效果
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Digital Effect>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
desired Digital Effect option, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The display mode is set to the selected
mode.
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
4
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
6
OK Select
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Notes
 You can directly access the Digital Effect
Move
function by using the [QUICK MENU] button.
page 27
7
 The Mosaic, Mirror, Emboss2, or Pastel2
mode is not available while DIS or Color Nite
is in use.
 Digital Effect modes are not available while
EASY.Q is in use.
Art
 Once DIS, EASY.Q, Color Nite is set, Mosaic,
Mirror, Emboss2, or Pastel2 mode will be
released.
 Digital Zoom is not available in the Mosaic,
Mirror, Emboss2, or Pastel2 mode.
 Mirror mode is not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
 Digital Effect modes other than Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or
Mosaic mode is available while DIS is in use.
58
►Auto
►Auto
►Off
►Off
►Off
►Off
Off
Art
Mosaic
Sepia
Negative
Mirror
OK Select
STBY SP
MENU Exit
MENU Exit
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Camera>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Digital Effect>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的數位
效果選項,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 顯示模式將設為選擇的模式。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
附註
 您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取
Digital Effect 功能。第 27 頁
 Mosaic、Mirror、Emboss2 或 Pastel2 模式,
在啟用 DIS 功能或 Color Nite 時無法使用。
 Digital Effect 模式在啟用 EASY.Q 時不能使用。
 一旦設定 DIS、EASY.Q、Color Nite,
Mosaic、Mirror、Emboss2 或 Pastel2 模式
將被解除。
 Digital Zoom 無法在 Mosaic、Mirror、
Emboss2 或 Pastel2 模式下使用。
 Mirror 模式無法在 16:9 Wide 模式下使用。
(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
 除了 Emboss2、Pastel2、Mirror 或 Mosaic
模式外的 Digital Effect 模式可在 DIS 模式中
使用。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Setting the 16:9 Wide mode (16:9 Wide)
設定 16:9 寬螢幕模式(16:9 Wide)
 16:9 Wide功能僅限在Camera Mode下操作。第 26 頁
 選擇此項以錄製要在 16:9 的寬螢幕電視機上播放的畫面。
 16:9 Wide 是 SC-DC164/DC165 機型的預設值。
 The 16:9 Wide function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 Select to record a picture to be played back on a 16:9 Wide TV.
 16:9 Wide is the default setting for models SC-DC164/DC165.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
6
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<16:9 Wide>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. To activate the 16:9 Wide function, move the
[Joystick] up or down to select <On>, then
press the [Joystick(OK)].
 If you do not want to use the 16:9 Wide
function, set the <16:9 Wide> menu to
<Off>.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
STBY SP
16:9 Wide
MENU Exit
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Camera>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<16:9 Wide>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 要啟動 16:9 寬螢幕功能,向上或向下
移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 若您不希望使用 16:9 寬螢幕功能,請將
<16:9 Wide> 選單設定為 <Off>。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 顯示模式將設定為選擇的模式。
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 The display mode is set to the selected mode.
Notes
 The 16:9 Wide mode is not available while DIS, EASY.Q or Digital
Effect is in use. (SC-DC163 only)
 Once Color Nite is set, 16:9 Wide mode will be released.
(SC-DC163 only)
 Digital Zoom is not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
Off
On
OK Select
Move
7
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
附註
16:9 Wide 模式無法在 DIS、EASY.Q 或 Digital Effect 啟用時使
用。(僅限 SC-DC163)
 一旦設定 Color Nite,16:9 Wide 模式將被解除。
(僅限 SC-DC163)
 Digital Zoom 不可在 16:9 Wide 模式中使用。

59
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Setting the Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS)
設定數位防手震功能(DIS)
 The DIS function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 DIS 功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 DIS (Digital Image Stabilizer) is a function that compensates for any shaking or  DIS(數位防手震功能)是補償手握 DVD 攝錄放影機時所產生的任何
hand movement while holding the DVD Camcorder (within reasonable limits).
震動或手部動作的功能(在合理範圍內)。
 It provides more stable pictures when:
 它可在以下情況提供更穩定的畫面:
- Recording with the zoom (If the DIS is set, Digital 4
- 使用縮放進行錄製(如果設定 DIS,Digital
Camera Mode
Zoom mode will be released.)
►Camera
Zoom 模式將取消)。
- Recording a small object close-up
Program AE
►Auto
- 錄製小型物體特寫
- Recording and walking at the same time
White Balance ►Auto
- 一邊走動一邊進行錄製
- Recording through the window of a vehicle
Digital Effect
►Off
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6.
7.







Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Camera>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <DIS>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
To activate the DIS function, move the [Joystick] up or
down to select <On>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 If you do not want to use the DIS function, set the
<DIS> menu to <Off>.
To exit, press the [MENU] button.
) is displayed.
 DIS icon (
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
6
OK Select
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
-
►Off
►Off
►Off
MENU Exit
Off
On
OK Select
MENU Exit
Notes
You can directly access the DIS function by using the 7
[QUICK MENU] button. page 27
Digital Zoom, Color Nite, Mosaic, Mirror, Emboss2,
or Pastel2 is not available in the DIS mode.
It is recommended that you deactivate the DIS
function when using a tripod.
If you use the DIS function, the picture quality may
deteriorate.
EASY.Q mode automatically sets the DIS to On.
16:9 Wide mode is not available in the DIS mode.
(SC-DC163 only)
DIS function in 16:9 Wide mode may produce lower quality than in normal
mode. (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
60
STBY SP
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
透過車窗進行錄製
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Camera>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <DIS>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 要啟動 DIS 功能,向上或向下移動 [Joystick]
以選擇 <On>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 若您不希望使用數位防手震功能,請將 <DIS>
選單設定為 <Off>。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 DIS 圖示(
)會顯示。
附註
您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取 DIS
功能。第 27 頁
 Digital Zoom、Color Nite、Mosaic、Mirror、
Emboss2 或 Pastel2 無法在 DIS 模式下使用。
 建議您在使用三腳架時關閉 DIS 功能。
 若您使用 DIS 功能,畫面品質可能下降。
 EASY.Q 模式會自動把 DIS 設定為 On。
 16:9 Wide 模式在 DIS 模式下無法使用。
(僅限SC-DC163)
 DIS 功能在 16:9 Wide 模式下可能產生比一般模
式低的品質。(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)

ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Advanced Recording
DVD 攝錄放影機:進階錄製
Zooming In and Out with Digital Zoom (Digital Zoom)
 The Digital Zoom works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 Zooming more than 30x (SC-DC163 only), 33x (SC-DC164/DC165
only) is achieved digitally, up to 1200x when combined with optical
zoom.
 The picture quality may deteriorate depending on how much you
zoom in on the subject.
4
 Digital Zoom 僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 數位縮放可達 30 倍(僅限 SC-DC163)、33 倍(僅限 SC-DC164/
DC165),加上光學縮放可達 1200 倍。
 畫面品質可能因為您對主體的放大程度而降低。
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Selecting the Digital Zoom
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Camera>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Digital Zoom>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
desired zoom value (Off, 100x, 200x, 400x or
1200x), then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 When using the zoom lever, an digital zoom
indicator appears on the screen.
使用數位縮放來放大及縮小(Digital Zoom)
Move
6
Notes
7
 Maximum zooming may result in lower picture
quality.
 Digital Zoom is not available while DIS,
EASY.Q, Color Nite, 16:9 Wide, Mosaic,
Mirror, Emboss2, or Pastel2 is in use.
 Once Color Nite, EASY.Q, 16:9 Wide,
Mosaic, Mirror, Emboss2, or Pastel2 is
selected, Digital Zoom mode will be released.
(The Digital Zoom mode will be backed up.)
 Once DIS is selected, Digital Zoom mode will be released.
選擇數位縮放
►Auto
►Auto
►Off
►Off
►Off
►Off
OK Select
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
Move
Off
100x
200x
400x
1200x
OK Select
STBY SP
W
MENU Exit
T
MENU Exit
0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Camera>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Digital Zoom>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的縮放值
(Off、100x、200x、400x 或 1200x),然後
按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 在使用縮放杆 ,螢幕上 出 位縮放指示。
附註
 最大程度的縮放可能導致較低的畫面品質。
 Digital Zoom 無法在 DIS、EASY.Q、Color
Nite、16:9 Wide、Mosaic、Mirror、Emboss2
或 Pastel2 啟用時使用。
 若設定 Color Nite、EASY.Q、16:9 Wide、
Mosaic、Mirror、Emboss2 或 Pastel2,Digital
Zoom模式將被解除。(數位縮放模式將被備份。)
 一旦設定了 DIS,Digital Zoom 模式
將被解除。
61
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Thumbnail index and Playlist DVD 攝錄放影機:縮圖索引和播放清單
What is the Thumbnail Index?
什麼是縮圖索引?
 The thumbnail index displays multiple titles
scenes that have been recorded.
 A title scene is created between the points
where you start and stop a recording. Once
deleted, you cannot recover the title scene
again.
 縮圖索引會顯示已錄製的多個標題場景。
 錄製的起點和終點之間會建立一個標題。
一旦刪除標題將無法還原。
[1/9]
Previous Page
Next Page
Current title scene/Total title scenes
What’s a Playlist?
DVD-RW(VR mode)
什麼是播放清單? DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 You can create a Playlist on the same disc by
gathering your favorite scene from the recorded title
scenes.
You can edit the Playlist without changing the
original recordings.
 Even if the Playlist is deleted, the original title
scenes remain undeleted.
 Up to 999 title scenes (chapters) can be registered
on a Playlist.
Playlist
[1/7]
Previous Page
Next Page
Example: You have recorded a few scenes on a
DVD-RW in VR mode. You want to save the original
Current Playlist/Total Playlists
recording, but you also want to create a playlist by putting
your favorite scenes together.
In this case, you can create a Playlist by selecting your favorite scenes,
leaving the original recording as it is.
JAN.12.2006
Title scene 1
A title scene is created
between the points where you
start and stop a recording.
Once deleted you cannot
recover the title scene again.
62
10:00 AM
Title scene 2
10:30 AM
Playlist 1
 您可以從錄製的標題(標題清單)中選擇喜愛的
場景集合在一起製作一個播放清單。
播放清單可以編輯,且不會更動到原來的錄製
內容。
 即使刪除了播放清單,原來的標題清單仍會保留
而不被刪除。
 一份播放清單最多可以註冊 999 個標題場景
(章節)。
例如:您使用 VR 模式在 DVD-RW 中錄製了一些場
景。 您想要儲存原來的錄製,但也想建立一個摘要將
喜歡的場景放在一起。 在這個情況下,您可以建立一
個播放清單只選錄幾個喜歡的場景,同時保留原來的
錄製內容。
JAN.30.2006
Title scene 3
11:30 AM
Title scene 4
02:00 PM
Title scene 5
02:10 PM
Title scene 6
02:20 PM
Title scene 7
02:30 PM
標題建立於錄製的開始
點和結束點間。
標題一旦刪除便無法
還原。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
Playing Title Scenes
DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
The recorded title scenes are displayed as a thumbnail
index (multiple images) on the LCD Screen.
You can find the desired scene quickly using this
convenient index. If the TFT LCD screen is closed,
you can view the recording through the viewfinder.
Use the Playback related buttons on the DVD
Camcorder or on the remote control. page 64
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the disc you want to view.
Open the LCD Screen.
Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
 Use the [MENU] button to adjust brightness
or color of the LCD Screen. page 36
5. Use the [Joystick] to select a title scene to be
played, then press the [Joystick(OK)] or []
button.
 To stop playback, press the [(Stop)] button.
播放標題場景 DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
4
[1/9]
Previous Page
5
Next Page
► SP 0:00:01
-RW
VR
001
Note
During playback, a displayed image may be paused for a while
until the next image to be shown.
Adjusting the Volume
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 When you use the LCD Screen for playback, you
can hear recorded sound from the built-in speaker.
 When you hear sound once the disc is in play,
use the [VOL -,+] buttons to adjust the volume.
 A volume level display will appear on the LCD
Screen.
 Levels may be adjusted from anywhere
between 00 to 19.
 If you close the LCD Screen while playing,
you will not hear sound from the speaker.
錄製的標題清單會以縮圖(多個影像)方式顯示
在 LCD 螢幕上。
使用方便的索引您可以很快速的找到想要的場
景。 如果 LCD 關閉,您可以使用觀景窗檢視錄
製內容。 使用 DVD 攝錄放影機或遙控器上的播
放相關按鈕。第 64 頁
1.
2.
3.
4.
插入您要檢視的光碟。
打開 LCD 螢幕。
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Player)]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
 使用 [MENU] 按鈕調整 LCD 螢幕的亮度或
色彩。第 36 頁
5. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要播放的標題清單,然
後按下 [Joystick(OK)] 或 [] 按鈕。
 若要停止播放,請按下 [(Stop)] 按鈕。
附註
播放時顯示的影像可能保留靜止一段時間,直到下
一個影像顯示。
調整音量 DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
► SP 0:00:01
-RW
VR
001
10
 使用 LCD 螢幕播放時,您可以從內建喇叭聽到
錄製的音效。
 聽到光碟播放的錄音時,請使用 [VOL -,+] 音量
按鈕調整音量。
 LCD 螢幕上會出現音量顯示。
 音量調整範圍從 00 到 19。
 如果在播放時關閉 LCD 螢幕,您將不會從喇
叭聽到音效。
63
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
DVD 攝錄放影機
Various Functions while in Player Mode
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 These functions work only in Player Mode. page 26
 Play, Still, Stop, Fast Forward, Rewind,
Forward Skip, and Reverse Skip functions are
accessible using the remote control.
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
 Slow function is accessible only using the
remote control. (SC-DC164/DC165 only)
播放機模式下的各種功能
 此功能僅可在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 遙控器可使用的功能有:播放、靜止、停止、
快進、回轉、向前略過、倒退略過。
(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
 慢速功能只有在遙控器上能使用。
(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
Playback/Still


播放/靜止
Press the [] button to pause during playback.
To resume playback, press the [] button.


Picture Search (Forward/Reverse)





Press and hold the []/[] buttons during
playback.
When playing a disc, if you press and hold the [] button, it
moves to the next scene. If you press and hold the [] button,
it moves to the beginning of the scene. One more press and hold
makes it move to the beginning of the previous scene. If you press
and hold the [] button at a portion 3 seconds from the start of
scene, it moves to the beginning of the previous scene.
播放時按下 [] 按鈕。
要恢復播放,按下 [] 按鈕。
畫面搜尋(前進/倒退)
Pressing the []/[] button once while a disc is
playing back will increase the play speed to approximately
X2, and pressing twice plays at approx x16.
When the number 1 appears on the OSD, it means
X2 speed. Number 2 = X16.
To resume normal playback, press the [] button.
Same as []/[] buttons on the remote control.




Skip Playback (Forward/Reverse)

播放光碟時按一下 []/[] 按鈕將使播放速度大
約增加至 2 倍,按兩下該按鈕則會以大約 16 倍的
速度播放。
當數字 1 顯示在 OSD,代表 2 倍速度。
數字 2 = 16 倍。
要恢復正常速度播放,按下 [] 按鈕。
等同於遙控器上的 []/[] 按鈕。
略過播放(向前/倒退)

 播放時按住 []/[] 按鈕。
播放光碟時,如果按住 [] 按鈕,會移至下一個場景。
如果按住 [] 按鈕,會移至場景的開頭。再按一次會移到上一場景的
開始處。 再按一下並按住會移到上一場景的開始處。如果在場景開始
的 3 秒處按住 [] 按鈕,會移至前一個場景的開始處。
Portion being played back
Press and hold the Press and hold Press and hold Press and hold the
button one more time. thebutton. thebutton. button one more time.
Scene 1
64
Scene 2
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
Scene 3
Portion being played back
Press and hold
thebutton.
Press and hold
thebutton.
Press and hold the
button one more time.
Scene 1
Scene 2
Scene 3
再次按住
 按鈕。
正在播放的部分
按住 
按住 
按鈕。
按鈕。
場景 1
場景 2
場景 3
按住  按鈕。
再次按住
 按鈕。
場景 2
場景 3
正在播放的部分
按住  按鈕。
場景 1
再次按住
 按鈕。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
DVD 攝錄放影機
Slow Playback (Forward/Reverse)
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
Slow 播放(前進/倒退)(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
Forward Slow Playback
 Press the [|] button on the remote control
during playback.
- To resume normal playback, press the []
button.
慢動作前進播放
 播放時按遙控器上的 [|] 按鈕。
- 要恢復正常速度播放,按下 [] 按鈕。
65
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
Zooming during Playback (PB ZOOM)
DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 The PB ZOOM function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 The PB ZOOM function enables you to magnify the playback
scene.
播放時縮放(PB ZOOM) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 PB ZOOM 功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 PB ZOOM 功能讓您能放大播放。
3
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
3. Use the [Joystick] to select a title scene to be
played, then press the [Joystick(OK)] or []
button.
3. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇一個要播放的標題清單
場景,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)] 或 []
按鈕。
4. Move the [Zoom] lever toward [T(Tele)] to
activate the PB Zoom during playback.
 The image is magnified starting from the
center of image.
4
► SP 0:00:00
PB ZOOM 2.0x
-RW
VR
001
4. 播放時將 [Zoom] 桿向 [T(Tele)] 啟動播放縮
放功能。
 該影像會從影像的中央開始放大。
5. You can zoom in from 2.0x to 8.0x by moving
the [Zoom] lever.
 It zooms 2.0x  4.0x  8.0x progressively.
 Zoom ratio is displayed.
5. 移動 [Zoom] 桿,您可以放大影像 2.0 倍至
8.0 倍。
 它以 2.0 倍  4.0 倍  8.0 倍的順序
放大。
 縮放比率會顯示。
6. Use the [Joystick] to move the screen up,
down, right or left.
6. 使用 [Joystick] 向上、向下、向右、向左移
動螢幕。
7. To cancel the PB Zoom function, move the [Zoom] lever toward
[W(Wide)].
Notes
 You cannot apply the PB ZOOM function to pictures which are
being input from an external video source.
 The PB ZOOM images cannot be exported to a PC.
66
7. 若要取消播放縮放功能,將 [Zoom] 桿向 [W(Wide)] 移動。


附註
PB ZOOM 功能無法套用至從外部視訊來源輸入的相片。
PB ZOOM 影像無法匯出至電腦。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
Deleting a Title Scene (Delete)
DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD -RW/+RW
刪除標題(Delete) DVD-RW/+RW
 Delete function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 Individual or all title scenes can be deleted.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
4
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Delete>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Select> or <Select All>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 Select: Deletes individual title scenes.
5
To delete individual title scenes, use the
[Joystick] to select title scenes to delete,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
The selected title scenes will be marked
< >.
 Select All: Deletes all title scenes.
To delete all title scenes, simply press
the [Joystick(OK)] after <Select All> is
selected.
All title scenes will be marked with < >.
7
6. Move the [Joystick] up to select <Execute>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Delete?> message will appear.
7. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 All selected title scenes will be deleted.
 Related scenes in Playlist will be deleted.
(DVD-RW(VR mode only))
Note
A deleted title scenes can not be recovered.
 Delete 功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 可以刪除個別或全部標題場景。
[1/9]
Delete
Partial Delete
Select
Q.MENU Exit
Delete
[1/9]
Back
Execute
Move
OK Select
Delete
Execute
Back
Delete?
Yes
Move
No
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
3. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Delete>
,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick],選擇 <Select>
或 <Select All>,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 Select:刪除個別檔案。
若要刪除個別檔案,請使用 [Joystick] 選擇
要刪除的檔案,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
選擇的檔案會以 < > 標記。
 Select All:刪除全部檔案。
若要刪除全部檔案,只要在選擇
<Select All> 後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
全部檔案都會以 < > 標示。
6. 向上移動 [Joystick] 選擇 <Execute>,然後按
下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Delete?> 訊息會顯示。
7. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,然
後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 接著便會刪除所有選擇的標題。
 播放清單中的相關檔案會一起刪除。
(DVD-RW(僅限 VR 模式))
OK Select
附註
刪除的標題將無法復原。
67
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder
Deleting a Section of a Title Scene (Partial Delete)
 Partial Delete function works only in Player Mode.
page 26
 A Title scene can be partially deleted.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR
Mode). You should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode
before recording. page 41
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
DVD 攝錄放影機
DVD-RW(VR mode)
4
Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Player)].
Set the [Power] switch to [
Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Partial
5
Delete>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] to select a title scene you want
to delete partially from the thumbnail index screen,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The selected title scene will be paused, then
<Start> will be highlighted.
Search the start point of deletion by pressing the
[/] or [] button.
Press the [] button at the start point to pause the
9
screen, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 <End> will be highlighted.
Press the [/] or [] button to search the
end point of deletion.
Press the [] button at the end point to pause the
screen, then press [Joystick(OK)].
 <Execute> will be highlighted.
Press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Delete selected part ? Please confirm.>
message will appear.
11
Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The selected part of the title scene will be deleted.
 Use the [Joystick] to select <Back>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)] to return to the thumbnail
index screen.
Note
A deleted part of the title scene can not be recovered.
68
刪除標題的一個部分(Partial Delete) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
[1/9]
Delete
Partial Delete
Q.MENU Exit
Partial Delete
001
SP 00:00:00 -RW
Start
End
Execute
Play
Pause
Partial Delete
001
SP 00:00:12 -RW
Start
End
Execute
Pause
Play
Partial Delete
001
00:00:15
Back
Search
00:00:15
Back
Search
SP 00:00:12 -RW
Delete selected part ?
Please confirm.
Yes
No
00:00:15
Start
End
Execute Back
Search
Pause
Play
 Partial Delete 功能僅限在 Player Mode
下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以刪除標題場景的一部分。
 這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)
下操作。 在錄製前,您應先將 DVD-RW 格式
化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Player)]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Partial Delete>,然後按[Joystick(OK)]。
5. 移動 [Joystick],從縮圖索引螢幕中選擇要部
分刪除的標題場景,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 選擇的標題將會暫停,然後反白顯示
<Start>。
6. 按 [/] 或 [] 按鈕來搜尋刪除的起
始點。
7. 在起始點按下 [] 按鈕以暫停場景,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 接著會反白顯示 <End> 。
8. 按 [/] 或 [] 按鈕來搜尋刪除的結
束點。
9. 在結束點按下 [] 按鈕以暫停場景,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 接著會反白顯示 <Execute>。
10. 按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Delete selected part ? Please confirm.>
訊息將會顯示。
11. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 標題所選擇的部分便會刪除。
 使用 [Joystick] 選擇 <Back>,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)] 返回標題清單。
1.
2.
3.
4.
附註
刪除的標題部分將無法復原。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
Creating a New Playlist (New Playlist)
 This function works only in Player Mode.
page 26
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW
(VR Mode).
You should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode
before recording. page 41
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
DVD-RW(VR mode)
3
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Player)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
5
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the
thumbnail index screen icon ( ), then move the
[Joystick] right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
 No thumbnail index is provided before
creating a Playlist.
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
7
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<New Playlist>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
6. Use the [Joystick] to select a scene to create,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 Keep selecting in the order of your
preference.
 The selected scene will be marked with <>.
7. Move the [Joystick] up to <Add>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 A new Playlist will be created.
Notes
 Up to 99 playlist can be created.
 Up to 999 title scenes (chapters) can be
registered on a Playlist.
建立新的播放清單(New Playlist) DVD-RW(VR 模式)

Playlist

Previous Page
1.
2.
Next Page
Playlist
3.
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
4.
5.
Q.MENU Exit
New Playlist
Add
Previous Page
Back
6.
7.
Next Page
Playlist
這項 功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)
下操作。 在錄製前,您應先將 DVD-RW 格式
化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Player)]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕
圖示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯
示播放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
 在建立播放清單前,不會提供縮圖索引。
按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<New Playlist>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
使用 [Joystick] 選擇要建立的場景,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)]。
 請依個人喜好繼續選擇。
 選擇的場景會標上 <>。
向上移動 [Joystick] 至 <Add>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 接著便會建立新的播放清單。
[1/1 ]
附註


Previous Page
Next Page
可建立多達 99 個播放清單。
一份播放清單最多可以註冊 999 個標題場景
(章節)。
69
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
Playing the Playlist
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
DVD-RW(VR mode)
播放播放清單 DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 This function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 The Playlist scenes are displayed in the form of a thumbnail index
on the LCD Screen.
If the LCD Screen is closed, you can view the recording through
the viewfinder.
Use the Playback related buttons on the DVD Camcorder or on the
remote control. page 64
3
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW
(VR Mode). You should format the DVD-RW to
VR Mode before recording. page 41
 這項功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 播放清單場景會以縮圖索引的形式顯示在 LCD 螢幕上。
如果 LCD 關閉,您可以透過觀景窗檢視錄製的內容。 使用
DVD 攝錄放影機或遙控器上的播放相關按鈕。第 64 頁
 這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下操作。 在錄製前,
您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
[1/9]
1. Insert the disc you want to view.
1. 插入要檢視的光碟。
2. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Player)].
3. Set the [Power] switch to [
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
4. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the
thumbnail index screen icon ( ), then move
the [Joystick] right to highlight the playlist icon
( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
5. Use the [Joystick] to select a Playlist to be
played, then press the [] button.
6. Press the [VOL -,+] buttons to adjust volume.
 The sound will be heard through the built-In
speaker.
2. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Previous Page
4
(Player)]。
3. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
Playlist
[1/7]
Previous Page
6
Next Page
►
10
70
Next Page
0:00:01 -RW
VR
4. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕
圖示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯
示播放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
5. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要播放的播放清單,然後
按下 [] 按鈕。
6. 按 [VOL -,+] 按鈕調整音量。
 您會從內建喇叭聽到聲音。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
Deleting a Playlist (Delete)
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
DVD-RW(VR mode)
刪除播放清單(Delete) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 Delete function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 You can delete undesired playlists.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR Mode). You should
format the DVD-RW to VR Mode before recording. page 41
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the thumbnail
index screen icon ( ), then move the [Joystick]
right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Delete>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Select> or <Select All>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 Select: Deletes an individual playlist.
To delete a playlist, use the [Joystick] to
select a playlist to delete, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
The selected playlist will be marked with < >.
 Select All: Deletes all playlists.
To delete all playlists, simply press the
[Joystick(OK)] after <Select All> is
selected.
All the selected playlists will be marked with
< >.
7. Move the [Joystick] up to select <Execute>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 <Delete?> message will appear.
8. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
<Yes>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 All selected playlists will be deleted.
5
 Delete 功能僅限在 Player Mode下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以刪除不需要的播放清單。
 這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下操作。 在錄製前,
您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
Playlist
[1/7]
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
3. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕
圖示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯
示播放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
Select
Q.MENU Exit
6
Delete
4. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
Playlist
[1/7]
Back
Execute
Move
7
Delete
OK Select
Playlist
Execute
Back
Delete?
Yes
Move
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
No
OK Select
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 至 <Delete>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick],選擇 <Select>
或 <Select All>,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 Select:刪除個別播放清單。
若要刪除播放清單,請使用 [Joystick]
選擇要刪除的播放清單,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)]。
選擇的場景會標上 < >。
 Select All:刪除所有播放清單。
若要刪除全部檔案,只要在選擇
<Select All> 後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
所有選擇的播放清單會標上 < >。
7. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Execute>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Delete?> 訊息將會顯示。
8. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 所有選擇的播放清單將會刪除。
71
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
Adding Scenes to Playlist (Edit Playlist-Add)
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
DVD-RW(VR mode)
 This function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 You can add more scenes in an existing Playlist.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR Mode). You
should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode before recording.
page 41
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
將場景新增至播放清單(Edit Playlist-Add) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 這項功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以將更多的場景新增至現有的播放清單。
 這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下操作。 在錄製前,
您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
2
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the
thumbnail index screen icon ( ), then move the
[Joystick] right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
[1/9]
Previous Page
5
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Edit Playlist>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The screen will be switched to the Edit
Playlist mode.
6. Use the [Joystick] to select the Playlist to which
you wish to add scenes, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The scenes inside the Playlist will appear.
7. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
72
3. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕圖
示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯示播
放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
Next Page
Playlist
[1/7]
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
Q.MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
4. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Edit Playlist>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 螢幕會切換至編輯播放清單模式。
6. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要新增場景的播放清單,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 播放清單內的場景將會顯示。
7. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
8. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Add>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The title scenes to be added to the Playlist
will appear.
9. Use the [Joystick] to select the title scenes
to be added to the Playlist, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The selected scenes will be marked with
<>.
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
8
Playlist
[1/7]
Back
Add
Delete
Partial Delete
Move
9
Edit > Add
[4/9]
Back
Execute
Previous Page
11
8. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Add>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 要新增至播放清單的標題清單場景將會
顯示。
9. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要新增至播放清單的標題
清單場景,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 選擇的場景會標上 <>。
Q.MENU Exit
10. Move the [Joystick] up to select <Execute>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 <Want to add?> message will appear.
11. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
<Yes>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Now adding...> message will appear.
 The selected scenes will be added to the
Playlist. The new scene will be added as the
last scene.
Scene
Next Page
Edit > Add
10. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Execute>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Want to add?> 訊息將會顯示。
11. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Now adding...> 訊息將會顯示。
 選擇的場景便會新增至播放清單。 新的場景
會加入成為最後一個場景。
Back
Execute
Want to add?
Yes
Previous Page
No
Next Page
73
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
Changing the Order of Scene Playing within a Playlist
(Edit Playlist-Move) DVD-RW(VR mode)
 This function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 You can change the order of scene playing within a Playlist.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR Mode). You
should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode before recording.
page 41
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
變更播放清單內播放場景的順序(Edit Playlist-Move) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 這項功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

您可以變更播放清單內播放場景的順序。

這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下操作。在錄製前,
您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the
thumbnail index screen icon ( ), then move the
[Joystick] right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
[1/9]
Previous Page
5
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Edit Playlist>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The screen will be switched to the Edit
Playlist mode.
74
Next Page
[1/7]
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
Q.MENU Exit
6. Use the [Joystick] to select the Playlist which
contains the scenes whose order you want to change, then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 The scenes inside the Playlist will appear.
7. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
3. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕
圖示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯
示播放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
Playlist
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
4. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Edit Playlist>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 螢幕會切換至編輯播放清單模式。
6. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要變更場景播放順序的播
放清單,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 播放清單內的場景將會顯示。
7. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
8. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Move>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
8
Add
Delete
Partial Delete
Move
Q.MENU Exit
9
Edit > Move
Playlist
[1/9]
Back
Execute
8.
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Move>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
9.
使用 [Joystick] 選擇要移動的場景,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 選擇的場景會標上 <>。
場景旁邊也會出現一列。
10. 使用 [Joystick] 將該列移至您想要的位置,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 選擇的場景便會移至新位置。
11. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Execute>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Want to move?> 訊息將會顯示。
11. Move the [Joystick] up to select <Execute>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Want to move?> message will appear.
12. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
<Yes>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Now moving...> message will appear.
 You can move the scenes as many times as
you wish.
Playlist
[1/9]
Back
9. Use the [Joystick] to select the scene to be
moved, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The selected scene will be marked with <>.
Also a bar next to the scene will appear.
10. Use the [Joystick] to move the bar to the
position of your choice, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The selected scene will be moved to the new
position.
Scene
Previous Page
12
Next Page
Edit > Move
Playlist
Back
Execute
12. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按[Joystick(OK)]。
 <Now moving...> 訊息將會顯示。
 您可以視需要多次移動場景。
Want to move?
Yes
Previous Page
No
Next Page
75
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
Deleting Scenes from Playlist (Edit Playlist-Delete)
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
DVD-RW(VR mode)
 This function works only in Player Mode.
5
page 26
 You can delete the title scenes inside the Playlist.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR
Mode). You should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode
before recording. page 41
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Player)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the thumbnail
8
index screen icon ( ), then move the [Joystick]
right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the form
of a thumbnail index.
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Edit
Playlist>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The screen will be switched to the Edit Playlist
mode.
9
6. Use the [Joystick] to select the Playlist which
contains the scenes to be deleted, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The scenes inside the Playlist will appear.
7. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
8. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Delete>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
9. Use the [Joystick] to select the scenes to be
deleted, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
11
 The selected scenes will be marked with <>.
10. Move the [Joystick] up to select <Execute>, then
press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Delete?> message will appear.
11. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Now deleting...> message will appear.
 The selected scenes will be deleted.
76
從播放清單刪除場景(Edit Playlist-Delete) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
Playlist
[1/7]
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
Q.MENU Exit
Scene
Playlist
[1/9]
Back
Add
Delete
Partial Delete
Move
Q.MENU Exit
Edit > Delete
Playlist
[1/9]
Back
Execute
Previous Page
Edit > Delete
Next Page
Playlist
Back
Execute
Delete?
Yes
Previous Page
No
Next Page
 這項功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 您可以刪除播放清單中的標題場景。
 這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下
操作。 在錄製前,您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為
VR 模式。第 41 頁
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Player)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
3. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕圖
示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯示播
放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
4. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Edit Playlist>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 螢幕會切換至編輯播放清單模式。
6. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要刪除場景的播放清單,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 播放清單內的場景將會顯示。
7. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
8. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Delete>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
9. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要刪除的場景,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 選擇的場景會標上 <>。
10. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Execute>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Delete?> 訊息將會顯示。
11. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,然
後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Now deleting...> 訊息將會顯示。
 選擇的場景便會刪除。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
Deleting a Section of a Playlist (Edit Playlist-Partial
Delete) DVD-RW(VR mode)
 This function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 A Playlist scene can be partially deleted.
 The editing function only works on a DVD-RW (VR Mode).
You should format the DVD-RW to VR Mode before recording.
page 41
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
5
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the thumbnail
index screen icon ( ), then move the [Joystick]
right to highlight the playlist icon ( ).
 The Playlist scenes will be displayed in the
form of a thumbnail index.
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
8
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Edit Playlist>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The screen will be switched to the Edit Playlist
mode.
6. Use the [Joystick] to select the Playlist which
contains the scenes to be partially deleted, then
press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The scenes inside the Playlist will appear.
7. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
9
8. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Partial Delete>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
9. Use the [Joystick] to select the scene to be
partially deleted, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The Partial Delete screen will appear. The
scene will be paused and <Start> will be
highlighted.
刪除播放清單的一個部分(Edit Playlist-Partial Delete) DVD-RW(VR 模式)
 這項功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 可刪除播放清單的部分場景。

這項編輯功能僅限在 DVD-RW(VR 模式)下操作。
在錄製前,您應先將 DVD-RW 格式化為 VR 模式。第 41 頁
Playlist
[1/7]
New Playlist
Delete
Edit Playlist
Q.MENU Exit
Scene
Playlist
[1/9]
Back
Add
Delete
Partial Delete
Move
Q.MENU Exit
Partial Delete
001
SP 00:00:00 -RW
Execute
End
Start
Play
Pause
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
3. 向上移動 [Joystick],反白顯示縮圖索引螢幕圖
示 ( ),然後向右移動 [Joystick],反白顯示播
放清單圖示 ( )。
 播放清單場景將以縮圖索引的形式顯示。
4. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Edit Playlist>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 螢幕會切換至編輯播放清單模式。
6. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要部分刪除場景的被放清
單,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 播放清單內的場景將會顯示。
7. 按下 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕。
8. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Partial Delete>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
9. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要部分刪除的場景,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 部分刪除螢幕將會顯示。場景將會暫停,
並反白顯示 <Start>。
00:00:13
Back
Search
77
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Playlist
10. Press the [/] or [] to search the
starting point of deletion.
DVD 攝錄放影機:播放清單
13
11. Press the [] button to pause the screen
at the starting point of deletion, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 <End> will be highlighted.
12. Press the [/] or [] to search the end
point of deletion.
13. Press the [] button to pause the screen
at the end point of deletion, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 <Execute> will be highlighted.
14. Press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Delete selected part ? Please
confirm.> message will appear.
Partial Delete
001
15
Partial Delete
001
00:00:13
Back
Search
SP 00:00:10 -RW
Delete selected part ?
Please confirm.
Yes
10. 按下 [/] 或 [] 搜尋刪除的起始點。
11. 按下 [] 按鈕暫停刪除起始點的螢幕,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 接著會反白顯示 <End>。
Execute
End
Start
Pause
Play
No
Execute
End
Start
Play
Pause
15. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 The <Now deleting...> message will appear.
78
SP 00:00:10 -RW
00:00:13
Back
Search
12. 按 [/] 或 [] 來搜尋刪除的結束點。
13. 按下 [] 按鈕暫停刪除結束點的螢幕,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 接著會反白顯示 <Execute>。
14. 按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Delet selected part ? Please confirm.>
訊息將會顯示。
15. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Now deleting...> 訊息將會顯示。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
Disc Information (Disc Info)
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
光碟資訊(Disc Info) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 This function works in both Camera Mode and Player Mode.
page 26
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
4
(Camera)] or
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Disc Manager>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Disc Info>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 <Disc Name>, <Disc Type>,
<Disc Format>, <Used Space> and
<Free Space> will be displayed.
6. To exit, press the [MENU] button or
[Joystick(OK)].
 這項功能可在 Camera Mode 和 Player Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
Move
5
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
OK Select
MENU Exit
Disc lnfo
Disc Name: DVD-RW
Rename
Back
Disc Type
DVD-RW (Unfinalized)
Disc Format
VR Mode
Used Space
00:02:20
Free Space
Move
00:16:08 (SP)
OK Select
(Camera)] 或
MENU Exit
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Manager>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Info>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Disc Name>、<Disc Type>、
<Disc Format>、<Used Space> 和
<Free Space> 將會顯示。
6. 若要退出,按下 [MENU] 按鈕或
[Joystick(OK)]。
79
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
Editing the Disc Name (Disc Info-Rename)
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
 This function works in both Camera Mode and
Player Mode. page 26
 You can specify a disc name.
4
(Camera)] or
7. Use the [Joystick] to move the cursor to the first
character of the current disc name.
10. Use the [Joystick] to select <Done>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 The Disc Name will be changed.
 Use the [Joystick] to select <Back>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)] to return to Disc Manager
menu.
MENU Exit
DVD-RW (Unfinalized)
Disc Format
VR Mode
Used Space
00:02:20
Free Space
00:16:08 (SP)
8. 使用 [Joystick] 將游標移至 <Delete>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)] 來刪除現有光碟標題。
9. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇所要的字元和項目,然後
按 [Joystick(OK)]。
MENU Exit
OK Select
Disc Name
Disc Name : Science_
Done
Space
Delete
A
F
K
P
U
Z
B
G
L
Q
V
C
H
M
R
W
D
I
N
S
X
E
J
O
T
Y
a
f
k
p
u
z
b
g
l
q
v
c
h
m
r
w
d
i
n
s
x
e
j
o
t
y
1
6
+
!
:
@
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Rename>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 光碟名稱畫面將會顯示。
7. 使用 [Joystick] 將游標移至目前光碟標題的第
一個字元。
Back
Disc Type
Move
80
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Info>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Disc lnfo
Move
(Camera)] 或
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Manager>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Disc Name : DVD-RW
Rename
10
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
[
(Player)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
OK Select
Move
8. Use the [Joystick] to move the cursor to <Delete>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)] to delete the existing
disc name.
9. Use the [Joystick] to select the desired characters
and items, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
MENU Exit
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Disc Info>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
OK Select
Move
5
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Disc Manager>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
<Rename>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 Disc Name screen will appear.
 這項功能可在 Camera Mode 和 Player Mode
下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以指定光碟的名稱。
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
[
(Player)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
編輯光碟名稱(Disc Info-Rename) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
Back
2
7
?
;
#
OK Select
3
8
*
~
“
$
4
9
/
,
(
%
5
0
^
.
)
&
10. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Done>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 光碟名稱變更。
 使用 [Joystick] 選擇 <Back>,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)] 返回光碟片管理器選單。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
Formatting a Disc (Disc Format)
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
DVD-RW/+RW
格式化光碟(Disc Format) DVD-RW/+RW
 This function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 You can format a recorded disc to be used again. By formatting, all existing
data will be deleted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
(Camera)].
Set the [Power] switch to [
Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Disc
Manager>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Disc
Format>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Video Mode> or <VR Mode>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)]. (DVD-RW only) Set the mode
depending on the application.
 If you insert DVD-RW disc, the <Disc format?
(Video or VR) All files will be deleted!>
message will appear.
Video
(Video
Mode)
VR (VR
Mode)
7.



Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
OK Select
Move
5
If the disc has been finalized, it enables
the disc to be played back on other DVD
Players/Recorders.
You can edit the disc on a DVD Camcorder,
but playback is only possible on a DVD
Recorder that supports VR mode.
 Refer to page 12 for Finalized disc compatibility.
 If you insert DVD+RW disc <Disc format? All
files will be deleted!> message will appear.
Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Yes>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 When formatting is complete, the <Complete!>
message will appear.
Notes
4
 這項功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以格式化已錄製的光碟以重新使用該光碟。格式化時,所有現
有的資料都會被刪除。
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
6
Video Mode
VR Mode
OK Select
Move
STBY
MENU Exit
MENU Exit
SP 00:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
Disc format? (Video)
All files will be deleted!
Yes
No
Cannot edit in camcorder.
The Finalize/Format functions are not available at
battery level
and
.
Formatting will delete all the recorded contents on a
disc. Be careful not to delete data by mistake.
Do not turn the power off in the middle of the formatting. The data recorded
in disc may be damaged.

1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
(Camera)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Manager>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Format>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 選擇 <Video Mode>
或 <VR Mode>,然後按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
(僅限 DVD-RW)根據用途設定模式。
 如果您插入 DVD-RW 光碟,<Disc format?
(Video 或 VR)All files will be deleted!> 訊
息會顯示。
Video
(視訊模式)
如果光碟已終結,就可以在其他 DVD
播放機/錄影機上播放。
VR
您可以在 DVD 攝錄放影機上編輯光
(視訊錄製模式) 碟,但僅能在支援視訊錄製模式的
DVD 錄影機上播放光碟。
 有關終結光碟相容性的資訊,請參閱第 12 頁。
 如果您插入 DVD+RW 光碟 <Disc format? All
files will be deleted!> 訊息會顯示。
7. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 格式化完成時,<Complete!> 訊息會顯示。
附註
 電池電量處於
或
時,格式化/終結功能
將無法使用。
 格式化將會刪除光碟上的所有錄製內容。請小心
不要意外刪除資料。
請勿在格式化期間關閉電源。 光碟中錄製的資料可能會毀損。
81
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
Finalizing a Disc (Disc Finalize)
DVD-RW/-R/+R DL
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
終結光碟(Disc Finalize) DVD-RW/-R/+R DL
 This function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 這項功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 To play the contents of a DVD-RW/-R/+R DL on other DVD Players/
 若要在其他 DVD 播放器/錄影機上播放 DVD-RW/-R/+R DL 的內容,您
Recorders, you must finalize the disc. When finalizing, there should be
必須先終結光碟。當終結光碟時,電池須有足夠的電力。 如果要使用
enough power in the batteries. If an the AC Power adapter is to be used,
交流電源,請確定已正確連接插孔。 如在終結光碟時電源中斷,有可
make sure that the jack is properly connected. A power cut during finalizing
能會使光碟無法播放。
may disrupt the disc from replaying.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
4
(Camera)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
Camera Mode
3.
按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
3. Press the [MENU] button.
►Disc Manager

選單清單將會顯示。
 The menu list will appear.
Disc Finalize
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Disc
Disc Unfinalize
<Disc Manager>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Manager>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Disc Format
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
Disc Info
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Disc
<Disc Finalize>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Finalize>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select <Finalize>,
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
<Finalize>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Move OK Select MENU Exit
 The <Finalizing, please wait...> message
 <Finalizing, please wait...> 訊息將會顯示。 終
will appear. When finalizing is complete the
結完成時,<Complete!> 訊息會顯示。
5
<Complete!> message will appear.
Camera Mode
警告
►Disc
Manager
Warning!
終結化期間,請勿碰撞或震動您的 DVD 攝錄放影
Disc Finalize
During finalizing, do not cause impact or vibration to your
機。否則可能導致機器故障。
Disc Unfinalize
DVD camcorder. This could cause a malfunction.
Disc Format
附註
Disc Info









Notes
The Finalize/Format functions are not available at
battery level
and
.
Once finalized, the title scenes or Playlists in the disc
cannot be deleted or edited.
Time required for finalizing may differ by disc type.
Refer to page 12 for finalized disc compatibility.
Playback is not guaranteed in all DVD Players/
Recorders. For compatibility details, refer to your
DVD Players/Recorders owner’s manual.
Once the DVD-R/+R DL disc is finalized, you cannot
re-record it in the DVD Camcorder.
You may play back DVD+RW discs on other devices
without finalizing them.
You can not make an additional recording on a
DVD-RW disc without unfinalizing it after it is finalized.
The finalized disc will not be supported in a Macintosh.
82

6
電池電量處於
或
時,格式化/終結功
能將無法使用。
Move OK Select MENU Exit
 一旦終結完成,便不能再刪除或編輯光碟中的
標題清單或播放清單。
 終結所需的時間會視光碟類型而定。
Disc Finalize
 有關終結光碟相容性的資訊,請參閱第 12 頁。
Disc Name : Science
 不擔保可在所有的 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。
Finalize
Rename
Back
有關相容性的詳情,請參閱您的 DVD 播放機/錄
Protect
Off
影機的使用手冊。
Disc Format
VR Mode
 DVD-R/+R DL 光碟一經終結,您便無法在 DVD
Used Space
00:02:20
攝錄放影機上重新進行錄製。
 DVD+RW 光碟不需終結也可以在其他裝置上播
Free Space
00:16:08 (SP)
放。
Move OK Select MENU Exit
 DVD-RW 光碟終結後,除非取消終結否則無法
進行更多錄製。
 Macintosh 不支援終結的光碟。
ENGLISH
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
臺 灣
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
Playing Back on a PC with DVD drive
在有 DVD 光碟機的電腦上播放
 The DVD disc can be played on a PC with a
DVD running media (DVD drive).
1. Turn on your PC.
2. Insert a finalized disc into the DVD drive of the
PC.
PC
 Starts DVD playback application software
and the disc will play.
 If DVD playback application does not
start automatically, run the application by
navigating through the Start menu.
Notes
 Use a DVD drive compatible to 3 1/2inches (8cm) discs. page 10
 A DVD playback application software should have been installed before
playing back a disc.
 Video and audio may be paused or skipped when you play back from a
DVD disc directly. In this case, copy the data into your hard disk drive.
 The finalized disc will not be supported in a Macintosh.
 A DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode can not play back on your PC.
 DVD 光碟可以在配備 DVD 播放媒體(DVD 光
碟機)的電腦上播放。
1. 開啟電腦。
2. 將終結的光碟插入電腦的 DVD 光碟機。
 啟動 DVD 播放應用程式軟體,影片便會開
始播放。
 如果 DVD 播放程式沒有自動啟動,請瀏覽
「開始」選單執行程式。
附註



Playing back a finalized disc on a DVD Player/Recorder


在 DVD 播放機/錄音機上播放終結光碟
To Playback a disc
DVD
You can playback finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode)/+R DL discs on DVD Players/Recorders.
Playback is not guaranteed in all DVD Players/
Recorders. For compatibility details, refer to
your DVD Player/Recorder owner’s manual.
Most DVD Players/Recorders can play back a
DVD+RW disc that has not been finalized.
 Refer to the page 12 for finalized disc
compatibility.
1. Turn on the DVD Player/Recorder.
2. Insert the finalized DVD disc into the tray of a DVD Player/Recorder.
 It may start playing automatically or press the PLAY button to start.
 For further details on playing back DVD discs, refer to the DVD
Player/Recorder user’s manual.
To Playback DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode:
A finalized DVD-RW in VR mode can be played back using a DVD Recorder
which is capable of playing VR mode DVD-RW discs in VR mode.
請使用與 3 1/2 吋(8 公分)光碟相容的 DVD 光碟機。第 10 頁
DVD 播放應用程式軟體應在播放前先行安裝好。
當您直接從 DVD 光碟播放內容時,視訊和音訊可能會有暫停或跳格的
現象。 在此情況下,請將資料複製到硬碟機。
Macintosh 不支援終結的光碟。
以視訊錄製模式錄製的 DVD-RW 光碟無法在您的電腦播放。
若要播放光碟
您可以在 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放終結的
DVD-R/-RW(Video 模式)/+R DL 光碟。
不擔保可在所有的 DVD 播放機/錄影機上播放。
有關相容性的詳情,請參閱您 DVD 播放機/錄影機
的使用者手冊。
多數 DVD 播放機可播放尚未終結的 DVD+RW
光碟。
 有關終結光碟相容性的資訊,請參閱第 12 頁。
1. 開啟 DVD 播放機/錄影機。
2. 將終結 DVD 光碟插入 DVD 播放機/錄影機的
托盤。
 光碟可能會自動播放,或要按 PLAY(播放)按鈕才會開始播放。
 如需播放 DVD 光碟的詳細說明,請參閱 DVD 播放機/錄影機的使
用者手冊。
若要播放在 VR 模式下所錄製的 DVD-RW 光碟:
以 VR 模式終結的 DVD-RW 可使用能播放 VR 模式 DVD-RW 光碟的 DVD
錄影機播放。
83
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Disc Manager
Unfinalizing a Disc (Disc Unfinalize)
DVD 攝錄放影機:光碟片管理器
DVD-RW
取消終結(Disc Unfinalize) DVD-RW
 This function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 If a DVD-RW disc had been finalized in the VR mode or Video
mode, you can unfinalize the disc for further recording.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Disc Manager>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <Disc Unfinalize>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
<Unfinalize>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 The <Unfinalizing, please wait...>
message will appear. When unfinalizing is
complete, the <Complete!> message will
appear.
Notes
 The Finalize/Format functions are not available
at battery level
and
.
 During unfinalizing, do not cause impact or
vibration to your DVD camcorder. This could
cause a malfunction.
84
 這項功能僅限在 Camera Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

如果 DVD-RW 光碟曾在 VR 模式或視訊模式下終結,您可以取消
終結光碟,以錄製更多內容。
Move
5
OK Select
MENU Exit
(Camera)]。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Manager>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Disc Unfinalize>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
Move
6
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Unfinalize>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Unfinalizing, please wait...> 訊息將會顯
示。 取消終結完成時,<Complete!> 訊息
會顯示。
OK Select
MENU Exit
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Name : Science
Unfinalize
Rename
Back
Protect
Off
Disc Format
VR Mode
Used Space
00:02:20
Free Space
Move
00:16:08 (SP)
OK Select
MENU Exit
附註
 電池電量處於
或
時,格式化/終結功能
將無法使用。
 取消終結化期間,請勿碰撞或震動您的 DVD 攝
錄放影機。
否則可能導致機器故障。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Connection
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接
Setting the AV In/Out (SC-DC165 only)
設定 AV 輸入/輸出(僅限 SC-DC165)
 AV In/Out function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 AV In/Out setting enables you to record signals from external
sources.
Also you can send your videos to external devices to record or
playback.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Player)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Record>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<AV In/Out>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Out>, <AV In> or <S-Video In>, then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 If you want to see the DVD Camcorder
videos on a TV, set <AV In/Out> menu to
<Out>.
 To exit, press the [MENU] button.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
Player Mode
►Record
Rec Mode
AV In/out
Move
6
 AV In/Out 功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

AV In/Out 設定可讓您錄製來自外部來源的訊號。
同時,您也可以將您的視訊傳送到外部裝置以進行錄製或播放。
OK Select
Player Mode
►Record
Rec Mode
AV In/out
Move
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
►SP
►Out
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
MENU Exit
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Record>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<AV In/Out>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Out
AV In
S-Video In
OK Select
STBY SP
(Player)]。
MENU Exit
0:00:10
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Out>、
<AV In> 或 <S-Video In>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 如果您要在電視上查看 DVD 攝錄放影機
的視訊,請將 <AV In/Out> 選單設定為
<Out>。
 若要退出,請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
-RW
VR
AV In
85
ENGLISH
DVD Camcorder: Connection
Viewing Recordings on TV
 The Playback function works only in Player Mode. page 26
Playing back on a TV Monitor
 To play back a disc, the television must be NTSC compatible.
page 116
 We recommend that you use the AC Power adapter as the power
source for the DVD Camcorder.
Connecting to a TV which has Audio/Video Input Jacks
臺 灣
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接
在電視上觀賞錄製內容
 這項播放功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
在電視機顯示器上播放
 若要播放光碟,電視必須是 NTSC 相容的。第 116 頁

我們建議您使用交流電源適配器作為 DVD 攝錄放影機的電源。
連接到具有聲訊/視訊輸入插孔的電視機
1. Connect the DVD Camcorder to your TV with the Multi-AV cable.
1. 使用 Multi-AV 纜線將 DVD 攝錄放影機連接到您的電視機。
 The yellow jack: Video
 黃色插孔:視訊
 The white jack:
TV
DVD Camcorder
 白色插孔:聲訊(左)
Audio(L)-mono
- 單聲道
 The red jack: Audio(R)
 紅色插孔:聲訊(右)
 If you connect to a
 若您連接了單聲道電視
monaural TV, connect
機,請將黃色插孔
the yellow jack (Video)
(視訊)連接到電視機
to the video input of
的視訊輸入並將白色插
the TV and the white
Signal flow
孔(聲訊左)連接到電
jack (Audio L) to the
視機的聲訊輸入。
audio input of the TV.
Multi-AV
Cable
2. Set the [Mode] switch to
2. 設定 [Mode] 開關為
[DISC].
[DISC]。
3. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
(Player)]。
3. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
4. Turn on the TV and set the TV/VIDEO selector on the TV to Video. 4. 打開電視機,然後將電視機上的 電視機/視訊選擇器設定為視訊。
 Refer to the TV user’s manual.
 請參閱電視機的使用者手冊。
5. Play the disc. page 63
5. 播放光碟。第 63 頁
Notes
附註
 You may use an S-Video connector on the cable to obtain better
 若您的電視機上有 S-Video 接頭,您可以使用纜線上的 S-Video
quality pictures if you have a S-Video connector on your TV.
接頭取得品質更佳的畫面。
 Even if you use an S-Video connector, you need to connect an
audio cable.
 即使您使用 S-Video 接頭,仍然需要連接聲訊纜線。
 If you connect the cable to the AV/S jack, you will hear sound from  若您將纜線連接到 AV/S 插孔,將會聽到 DVD 攝錄放影機的喇叭
the DVD Camcorder’s speakers.
所發出的音效。
 If only a mono audio input is available on the TV set, use the audio  若電視機上只有一個單聲道聲訊輸入可以使用,請將聲訊纜線用
cable with the white jack (Audio L).
於白色插孔(聲訊左)。
86
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Connection
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接
Connecting to a TV which has no Audio/Video Input Jacks 連接到不具有聲訊/視訊輸入插孔的電視機
 You can connect your DVD Camcorder to a TV through a VCR.
1. Connect the DVD
Camcorder to your VCR with
the Multi-AV cable.
 The yellow jack: Video
 The white jack: Audio(L)
- Mono
 The red jack: Audio(R)
VCR
DVD Camcorder
2. Connect a TV to the VCR.
3. 設定 [Mode] 開關為
[DISC]。
Signal flow
Antenna
1. 使用 Multi-AV 纜線將 DVD
攝錄放影機連接到您的
VCR。
 黃色插孔:視訊
 白色插孔:聲訊(左)
- 單聲道
 紅色插孔:聲訊(右)
2. 將電視機連接到 VCR。
TV
3. Set the [Mode] switch to
[DISC].
4. Set the [Power] switch to
[
(Player)].
 您可以透過 VCR 將您的 DVD 攝錄放影機連接到電視機。
Multi-AV Cable
4. 設定 [Power] 開關為
[
(Player)]。
5. Turn on both the TV and VCR.
 Set the input selector on the VCR to Line.
 Select the channel reserved for your VCR on the TV set.
5. 打開電視機和 VCR。
 將 VCR 上的輸入選擇器設定為線路。
 在電視機上選擇為 VCR 保留的頻道。
6. Play the disc. page 63
6. 播放光碟。第 63 頁
Notes
 If the VCR has an S-Video input terminal, you may use the S-Video
connector for better quality.
 Even if you use an S-Video connector, you need to connect an
audio cable.
 If only a mono audio input is available on the VCR set, use the
audio cable with the white jack (Audio L).
附註



若 VCR 配有 S-Video 輸入端子,為了提高品質,您可以使用
S-Video 連接器。
即使您使用 S-Video 接頭,仍然需要連接聲訊纜線。
若 VCR 上只有一個單聲道聲訊輸入可以使用,請將聲訊纜線用
於白色插孔(聲訊左)。
87
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Connection
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接
Copying a Disc onto a Tape
將光碟複製到錄影帶
 The copying function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 Connect your DVD Camcorder to a VCR using the AV/S jack to dub
the recording from a disc onto a VCR tape.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to
[DISC].
 這項複製功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

使用 AV/S 插孔連接 DVD 攝錄放影機與 VCR,以將光碟的錄製
內容複製到 VCR 錄影帶。
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
VCR
2. Set the [Power] switch to
[
(Player)].
DVD Camcorder
3. 將要複製的光碟放入您的
DVD 攝錄放影機。
3. Insert the disc you want to
copy in your DVD Camcorder.
4. Insert a new tape in your
VCR.
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為
[
(Player)]。
4. 在 VCR 中放入新錄影帶。
Signal flow
5. 使用 Multi-AV 纜線將 DVD 攝
錄放影機連接到您的 VCR。
 將 Multi-AV 纜線接到 VCR
的輸入插孔。
 黃色插孔:視訊
 白色插孔:聲訊(左)- 單聲道
 紅色插孔:聲訊(右)
5. Connect the DVD Camcorder
Multi-AV Cable
to your VCR with Multi-AV
cable.
 Connect the Multi-AV cable to the input jack on your VCR.
 The yellow jack: Video
 The white jack: Audio(L)-mono
6. 按下 VCR 上的 Record(錄製)按鈕開始錄製。
 The red jack: Audio(R)
6. Press the Record button on your VCR to start recording.
7. 攝錄放影機中的光碟。 請參閱第 63 頁有關播放的詳情。
 按下 [DISPLAY] 按鈕,不要顯示 OSD。
7. Play the disc on your DVD Camcorder. Please refer to Page 63 for
Playing.
 Press the [DISPLAY] button so as not to display OSD.
When Copying is Complete:
Stop recording on your VCR, then press the [(Stop)] button on your
DVD Camcorder.
88
當複製完成時:
停止 VCR 錄製,然後按下 DVD 攝錄放影機的 [(Stop)] 按鈕。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
DVD Camcorder: Connection
DVD 攝錄放影機:連接
Recording (Copying) a TV Program or Video Tape
onto a Disc (SC-DC165 only)
將電視節目或錄影帶錄製(複製)到光碟(僅限 SC-DC165)
 The Recording (Copying) function works only in Player Mode.
page 26
 Connect your DVD Camcorder to a VCR or a TV using the AV/S jack to
record a TV program or copy a video tape to a disc. Set the AV In/Out
before Recording (Copying). page 85
Recording (Copying) onto a Disc
1. Get your TV or VCR ready.
2. Connect the DVD Camcorder
to your VCR or TV with MultiAV cable.
 Connect the Multi-AV cable
to the output jack on your
VCR or TV
 The yellow jack: Video
 The white jack: Audio (L) –
Mono
 The red jack: Audio (R)
3. Insert an empty disc in your
DVD Camcorder.
 Please refer to page 11 for
selecting and formatting
discs.
 這項錄製(複製)功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

使用 AV/S 插孔連接您的 DVD 攝錄放影機至 VCR 或電視,以錄
製電視節目或將錄影帶拷貝到光碟。 請在錄製(複製)之前設定
AV In/Out。第 85 頁
錄製(複製)到光碟
1. 準備好電視機或 VCR。
TV
DVD Camcorder
or
VCR
Signal flow
Multi-AV Cable
To record from a VCR
4. Insert the tape to be played in your VCR.
 Pause at the starting point of playing.
5. Start copying by pressing the [Start/Stop] button on your DVD Camcorder.
6. Press the PLAY button on your VCR to play the tape.
To record from a TV
4. Select a TV channel to be recorded.
5. Start recording by pressing the [Start/Stop] button on your DVD Camcorder.
When Recording (Copying) is Complete:
Press the [Start/Stop] button on your DVD Camcorder to stop recording
(copying).
2. 使用 Multi-AV 纜線將 DVD
攝錄放影機連接到 VCR 或
電視。
 將 Multi-AV 纜線接到
VCR 或電視機的輸出插
孔。
 黃色插孔:視訊
 白色插孔:聲訊(左)
- 單聲道
 紅色插孔:聲訊(右)
3. 在 DVD 攝錄放影機中插入
空白光碟。
 請參閱第 11 頁有關選擇
和格式化光碟的說明。
從 VCR 錄製
4. 將要播放的錄影帶插入 VCR。
 暫停在播放的起始點。
5. 按下 DVD 攝錄放影機的 [Start/Stop] 按鈕開始複製。
6. 按下 VCR 上的 PLAY(播放)按鈕來播放錄影帶。
從電視錄製
4. 選擇要錄製節目的電視頻道。
5. 按下 DVD 攝錄放影機的 [Start/Stop] 按鈕開始錄製。
當錄製(複製)完成時:
按下 DVD 攝錄放影機的 [Start/Stop] 按鈕,停止錄製(複製)。
89
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
Using a Memory Card (Usable Memory Card) (not supplied)
 The Memory Card stores
and manages Photo/Moving
images recorded by the DVD
Camcorder.
 Before inserting or ejecting the
Memory Card, set the [Power]
switch to [Off] and open the
LCD Screen.
Memory Card Functions
Terminals
<MMC/SD>
1. Open the LCD Screen.
2. Open the Memory Card Cover.
3. Insert the Memory Card.
 Please insert the Memory Card with its terminals
facing upward.
4. Insert the Memory Card into the slot until it softly clicks.
5. Close the Memory Card Cover.
Open the LCD Screen.
Open the Memory Card Cover.
Slightly push the Memory Card inwards to pop it out.
Pull the Memory Card out of the slot and close the
Memory Card Cover.
90
Terminals
Protection Tab
Label
Inserting a Memory Card
1.
2.
3.
4.
使用記憶卡(可用記憶卡)(未提供)
Protection
Tab
 Recording/Viewing Photo/
Protection
Moving Images
Tab
 Protecting Images from
Adapter
accidental erasure (except
Memory Stick Duo/MMC)
Adapter
 The Memory Stick Duo/MMC
does not have a Protection Tab.
When using the Memory Stick
Duo/MMC, be careful not to edit <RS MMC/Mini SD>
Memory Stick Duo, RS MMC or Mini SD
or delete data by mistake.
 Deleting Photo/Moving Images should be inserted by using an Adapter (not
supplied).
stored in Memory Card.
 Marking Photo Images with Print Information
 Formatting Memory Cards
Ejecting a Memory Card
數位靜態相機模式
<Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO>
 記憶卡可以儲存和處理以 DVD
攝錄放影機所錄製的相片/動態
影像。
 插入和退出記憶卡之前,先將
[Power] 開關設定為 [Off],然後
開啟 LCD 螢幕。
記憶卡功能
 錄製/檢視相片/動態影像
Terminals
 避免影像被意外刪除(Memory
Stick Duo/MMC 除外)
Adapter
 Memory Stick Duo/MMC 沒有
保護標籤。使用 Memory Stick
Duo/MMC 時,請小心不要錯誤
編輯或刪除資料。
<Memory Stick Duo>
 刪除儲存在記憶卡中的相片/動
Memory Stick Duo、RS MMC 或 Mini SD 必須使
態影像。
用配接器插入(未提供)。
 為靜態影像標記列印資訊
 格式化記憶卡
插入記憶卡
1. 打開 LCD 螢幕。
2. 打開記憶卡蓋。
3. 插入記憶卡。
 請插入記憶卡,端子朝上。
4. 將記憶卡插入插槽直到輕輕卡入。
5. 關閉記憶卡蓋。
退出記憶卡
1.
2.
3.
4.
打開 LCD 螢幕。
打開記憶卡蓋。
將記憶卡輕輕向內推,直到彈出。
將記憶卡拉出插槽,並關閉記憶卡蓋。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Notes









附註
Do not apply excessive force when you insert/eject the Memory Card.
Do not turn the power off while recording, loading, erasing photo images or
formatting the Memory Card.
Do not place the Memory Card near a strong electro-magnetic device.
Do not allow metal substances to come in contact with the terminals on the Memory Card.
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Card.
After removing the Memory Card from the DVD Camcorder, keep it in a soft case
to prevent static shock.
The data stored on the Memory Card may be changed or lost as a result of misuse,
static electricity, electric noise or repair. Save important images separately. Samsung
is not responsible for data loss due to misuse.
The DVD Camcorder supports 2GB SD/MMC and lower. SD/MMC above 2GB
may not record or play properly.
16:9 Wide mode is not avaliable in M.Cam Mode and M.Player Mode.
Because wide LCD supports only 4:3 mode. (SC-DC164/DC165 only)








Structure of Folders and Files on the Memory Card

記憶卡中的資料夾與檔案結構
 The photo images that you recorded are saved in JPEG file format on the Memory
Card.
 The moving images that you recorded
are saved in MPEG4 file format on the
DCIM
Memory Card.
100 SSDVC
 Each file has a file number and all files
DCAM 0001
are assigned to a folder.
DCAM 0002
- A file number from DCAM0001
..
is sequentially assigned to each
..
recorded image.
101SSDVC
- Each folder is numbered from
100SSDVC and recorded on the
<Photo Image>
Memory Card.
 A file name is stipulated by DCF(Design rule for Camera File system).
DCF is an integrated image file format for digital cameras:Image files can be used
on all digital devices conforming to DCF.
Image Format
Photo Image
 Images are compressed in JPEG (Joint Photographic
Experts Group) format.
 The picture size is 800x600.
Moving Image
 Images are compressed in MPEG4 (Moving Picture Experts
Group) format.
 The picture size is 720x480.
請勿在插入/退出記憶卡時用力過度。
請勿在錄製、載入、刪除靜態影像或格式化記憶卡時關閉電源。
請勿將記憶卡放置在強波的電磁裝置附近。
請勿讓金屬物質接觸到記憶卡上的端子。
請不要讓記憶卡彎折、掉落或使它受到強大的衝撞。
從 DVD 攝錄放影機取出記憶卡後,請將它存放在軟盒中以防止靜電損害。
儲存在記憶卡的資料可能會因為錯誤使用、靜電、電源噪訊或維修而
變更或遺失。將重要的影像分開儲存。Samsung 將不負責由於錯誤使
用所造成的資料遺失。
DVD 攝錄放影機支援 2GB SD/MMC 以及更低的記憶卡。任何超過
2GB 的 SD/MMC 可能無法正常錄製或播放。
在 M.Cam Mode、M.Player Mode 下,16:9 Wide 無法使用。
同時,寬螢幕模式僅顯示於 4:3 縱橫比。(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)
 您所錄製的靜態影像會以 JPEG 檔案格式儲存在記憶卡上。
 您所錄製的動態影像會以 MPEG4
檔案格式儲存在記憶卡上。
 每個檔案都有一個檔案編號,並且
所有檔案都有指定的資料夾。
- 每個錄製的影像都會指定一個從
DCAM0001 開始的檔案編號。
- 每個資料夾則從 100SSDVC 開
始編號並錄製到 記憶卡上。
 檔案名稱由 DCF(相機檔案系統設計
<Moving Image>
規則)制定。DCF 是一種適用於數位
相機的整合式影像檔案格式:影像檔
案可用於所有符合 DCF 的數位裝置。
影像格式
靜態影像
000-0000
File number
Folder number
<M.Player Mode>
 影像以 JPEG(Joint Photographic Experts Group,
聯合影像專家群組)格式進行壓縮。
 影像大小為 800x600。
動態影像
 影像以 MPEG 4(Moving Picture Experts Group,
動態視訊專家小組)格式進行壓縮。
 影像大小 720x480。
91
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Selecting the Photo Quality (Photo Quality)


Photo Quality function works in both Player Mode and
M.Cam Mode. page 26
You can select the quality of a photo image to be
recorded.
4
Select the Photo Quality
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC] or [CARD].
If the [Mode] switch is set to [DISC], set the [Power]
(Player)].
switch to [
If the [Mode] switch is set to [CARD], set the [Power]
(Camera)].
switch to [
Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Memory>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Photo Quality>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the desired
photo quality (Super Fine, Fine or Normal), then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
To exit, press the [MENU] button.
 The icon of the selected option is displayed.
Number of Images that can be stored on a Memory Card
選擇相片品質(Photo Quality)
M.Cam Mode
►Memory
Photo Quality
File No.
Move
6
►Super Fine
►Series
OK Select
M.Cam Mode
►Memory
Photo Quality
File No.
Move
 Photo Quality 功能可在 Player Mode 和 M.Cam
Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以選擇錄製的靜態影像品質。
MENU Exit
Super Fine
Fine
Normal
OK Select
7
MENU Exit
選擇相片品質
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC] 或 [CARD]。
2. 如果 [Mode] 開關設為 [DISC],設定 [Power]
(Player)]。
開關為 [
如果 [Mode] 開關設為 [CARD],設定 [Power]
(Camera)]。
開關為 [
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Memory>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Photo Quality>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的影像
品質(Super Fine、Fine 或 Normal),然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選定模式的圖示將會顯示。
Quality
128MB
256MB
512MB
1GB
2GB
<Super Fine>
Approx.
600
Approx.
1200
Approx.
2400
Approx.
4960
Approx.
9740
Approx.
790
Approx.
1580
Approx.
3150
Approx.
6520
Approx.
12800
品質
128MB
256MB
512MB
1GB
2GB
<Fine>
<Super Fine>
Approx.
2540
Approx.
5070
Approx.
10490
Approx.
20000
大約
1200張
大約
2400張
大約
4960張
大約
9740張
<Normal>
Approx.
1270
大約
600張
<Fine>
大約
790張
大約
1580張
大約
3150張
大約
6520張
大約
12800張
<Normal>
大約
1270張
大約
2540張
大約
5070張
大約
大約
10490張 20000張
790
8 min
The number of images above are based on 800X600 Photo
Size.
Notes




You can directly access the Photo Quality function by using the
[QUICK MENU] button. page 27
The above approximate figures are based on number of images under normal
recording conditions.
The number of images shown above are based on normal recording conditions.
Up to 20,000 Photo images (JPEG) can be stored in a memory card.
92
記憶卡上可以儲存的影像數量
以上的影像數量基於 800X600 相片大小。
附註




您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取 Photo Quality 功能。第 27 頁
上述的概估數字是在正常錄製狀況下的影像數。
以上所示的影像數量基於正常的錄製情況。
記憶卡中最多可儲存 20,000 張相片 (JPEG)。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Setting the File Number (File No.)
設定檔案編號(File No.)
 File Number setting works only in M.Cam Mode. page 26
 File Numbers are given to images in the order they were recorded
when they are stored on the Memory Card.
 File numbers may be set as follows:
- <Series>: When there are existing files, the new image will be
named as the next number in the sequence.
- <Reset>: When there are no files stored on the Memory Card,
the file numbering starts from 0001.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Camera)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Memory>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<File No.>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select the
desired option (Series or Reset), then press
the [Joystick(OK)].
 The selected option is applied.
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
M.Cam Mode
►Memory
Photo Quality
File No.
Move
6
 檔案編號設定僅限在 M.Cam Mode下操作。第 26 頁
將為影像提供檔案編號以便在儲存到記憶卡上時記錄。

檔案編號可設定如下:

- <Series>:當存在現有檔案時,新影像將會按下一個數字順序
命名。
- <Reset>:當記憶卡中沒有已儲存的檔案時,檔案的編號將從
0001 開始。
OK Select
M.Cam Mode
►Memory
Photo Quality
File No.
Move
►Super Fine
►Series
MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Memory>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<File No.>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Series
Reset
OK Select
MENU Exit
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要
的選項(Series 或 Reset),然後按下
[Joystick(OK)]。
 所選的選項將會套用。
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
93
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Taking a Photo Image (JPEG) on the Memory Card
 You may take photo images while in M.Cam Mode and store the
images on the Memory Card. page 26
 You can take photo images using the remote control.(SC-DC164/
DC165 only)
 Audio will not be recorded with a photo image onto the Memory
Card.
 Please check the protection tab setting on your memory card
before recording. You may not be able to record when it is set to
lock.
1. Insert the Memory Card.
2. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
3. Set the [Power] switch to [
1. 插入記憶卡。
4
2. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
(Camera)].
4. After framing your subject, to record, fully press
the [PHOTO] button to take the picture.
 The picture is taken and saved into the
Memory Card within a few seconds.
 Taking another picture within this
interval is not possible.
 The <Photo capture> indicator appears
during the time it takes to save the
image.
3. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)]。
4. 框住要拍攝的物體後,將 [PHOTO] 按鈕按到底
拍攝相片。
 幾秒鐘的時間相片便拍攝完成並儲存於記憶
體。
 這段時間內無法再拍攝其他相片。
 儲存影像時, <Photo capture> 指示器會顯
示。
Photo capture
Notes
 Saved photo images will appear slightly
larger than what is shown on the LCD
screen when the photos are taken.
 Photo images are saved in the Memory Card in an 800x600 format.
 The number of photo images that can be stored depends on the
quality of the image.
94
拍攝記憶卡上的相片影像 (JPEG)
您可以在 M.Cam Mode下拍攝靜態影像,然後儲存影像於記憶卡

中。第 26 頁
您可以使用遙控器拍攝靜態影像(僅限 SC-DC164/DC165)。

聲訊將不會隨著靜態影像錄製到記憶卡中。

錄製前請先檢查您記憶卡上的保護標籤設定。 若設為鎖定,您將

無法錄製。
附註



已儲存的相片看起來要比拍攝時顯示在 LCD 螢
幕上的相片稍大一點。
靜態影像以 800x600 格式儲存於記憶卡。
靜態影像的儲存張數取決於影像的品質。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Viewing Photo Images (JPEG)
檢視靜態影像 (JPEG)
 This function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26
 You can playback and view photo images recorded on the Memory Card.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index of photo images
appears. If there are no recorded
images on the Memory Card,
<No file!> is displayed.
3. Use the [Joystick] to select a
desired photo images, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 To display the previous six images,
press and hold the [] button.
 To display the next six images, press the
[] button.
此功能僅限在 M.Player Mode下操作。第 26 頁

您可以播放和檢視錄製在記憶卡中的靜態影像。

Photo
100-0001
Previous Page
To view a Single Image
1. Use the [Joystick] to select a desired photo
image, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
2. Use the [/] buttons to search for the
desired photo image.
 To view the next image: press the []
button.
 To view the previous image: press the [] button.
 Keep pressing [] or [] to search for an image quickly.
Holding the [] or [] buttons will not change the displayed
image, but the file number will change until the button is
released. When the button is released, the selected file will be
displayed.
3. To return to thumbnail index, press the [
(MULTI DISP.)] button.
Notes
 Loading time may vary depending on the image size.
 Any large sized image taken with another device will be displayed
as a thumbnail image.
[1/10]
Next Page
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡內
沒有錄製影像,<No file!> 會顯示。
3. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇需要的相片影像,然後按
下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 要顯示前六個影像,請按住 [] 按鈕。
要顯示前六個影像,請按住 [] 按鈕。

若要檢視單一影像
1. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇需要的相片影像,然後按下
[Joystick(OK)]。
2. 使用 [/] 按鈕,搜尋想要的靜態影像。
 若要檢視下一個影像: 按下 [] 按鈕。
 若要檢視上一個影像: 按下 [] 按鈕。
 繼續按 [] 或 [] 快速搜尋影像。
按住 [] 或 [] 按鈕不會變更顯示的影
像,但在釋放按鈕之前檔案編號會變更。
直到釋放按鈕選擇的檔案才會顯示。
3. 若要返回縮圖索引,請按下 [ (MULTI DISP.)]
按鈕。
附註


載入時間將視影像大小而有所不同。
任何以其他裝置拍攝的大型影像將以縮圖影像顯示。
95
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
To view a Slide Show
1. Use the [Joystick] to select a desired photo
image, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
若要檢視連續放映
2. Press the [(S.SHOW)] button in the single
image display mode.
 All images will be played back consecutively
for 2~3 seconds each.
 The <Slide> is displayed. The Slide Show
will start from the current picture.
To stop the slide show, press the
[(S.SHOW)] button again.
5/10
Slide
100-0005
96
1.
使用 [Joystick] 選擇需要的相片影像,然後按
下 [Joystick(OK)]。
2.
在單一顯示狀態下,按下 [(S.SHOW)] 按鈕
 所有影像將連續各播放 2~3 秒鐘。
 <Slide> 將會顯示。 連續放映會從目前的圖
片開始。
若要停止連續放映,請再次按
[(S.SHOW)] 按鈕。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Protection from accidental Erasure (Protect)
保護以防止意外刪除(Protect)
 The Protect function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26
 You can protect important images from accidental erasure.
If you execute format, all images including protected images will be
erased.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index of photo images
appears. If there are no recorded images on
the Memory Card, <No file!> is displayed.
3. Use the [Joystick] to select images to be
protected.
4. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Memory>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Protect>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<On>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
) is displayed.
 The protection icon (
 To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Notes
 You can directly access the Protect function by
using the [QUICK MENU]. page 27
) mark
 Protected images will show the (
when they are displayed.
 If the write protection tab on the Memory
Card is set to LOCK, you cannot set image
protection.
3
 Protect 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以保護重要影像免於意外刪除。
如果執行格式化,包括保護影像在內的所有影像都會被刪除。
Photo
100-0001
[1/10]
Previous Page
7
M.Player Mode
►Memory
Delete
Delete All
Protect
Print Mark
Format
Move
Next Page
Off
On
OK Select
MENU Exit
Photo
100-0001
Previous Page
[1/10]
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
(Player)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡
內沒有錄製影像,<No file!> 會顯示。
3. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要保護的影像。
4. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Memory>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Protect>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
7. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <On>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 保護圖示 ( ) 顯示。
 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
附註



您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取保
護功能。第 27 頁
受保護的影像會顯示 ( ) 標記。
若記憶卡上的寫入保護標籤設定為鎖定,
您就不能設定影像保護。
Next Page
97
ENGLISH
Digital Still Camera Mode
Deleting Photo Images and Moving Images (Delete)
臺 灣
數位靜態相機模式
刪除靜態影像和動態影像(Delete)
 The Delete function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26
 Delete 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 You can erase the photo images and moving images recorded on
 您可以刪除錄製在記憶卡內的靜態影像和動態影像。
the Memory Card.
 若您要刪除受保護的影像,必須先關閉影像保護功能。
 If you want to delete protected images, you must first deactivate
 刪除的影像無法恢復。
the image protection.
 An image which has been deleted cannot be recovered.
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
3 Photo
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
100-0001
[1/10]
 The thumbnail index of photo image
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡內
appears. If there are no recorded images on
沒有錄製影像,<No file!> 會顯示。
the Memory Card, <No file!> is displayed.
3. 移動 [Joystick] 選擇要刪除的影像。
3. Use the [Joystick] to select an image to be
4. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
deleted.
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. Press the [MENU] button.
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
 The menu list will appear.
Previous Page
Next Page
<Memory>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Memory>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6
<Delete>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
M.Player Mode
 <Delete?> 訊息將會顯示。
►Memory
<Delete>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Delete
7. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,
 The <Delete?> message will appear.
Delete All
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
7. Move the [Joystick] left or right to select
Protect
 接著便會刪除所有選擇的影像。
<Yes>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
Print Mark
 The selected image will be deleted.
Format
 按下 [MENU] 按鈕以完成設定。
 Press the [MENU] button to finish setting.
附註
Move OK Select MENU Exit
Notes
 您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取刪
 You can directly access the Delete function by
除功能。第 27 頁
7 Photo
using the [QUICK MENU]. page 27
 若在記憶卡上找到錯誤的影像檔案,一則
 If an erroneous image file is found on the
100-0001
[1/10]
Memory card read error 訊息將會顯示。
Memory Card, the message Memory card read
這可能是由於從不同的數位裝置複製影像所
error will be displayed. It may be caused by
造成。
Delete?
copying images from different digital devices.
 格式化記憶卡將刪除所有儲存的影像。
 Formatting the Memory Card will delete all the
Yes
No
stored images. page 100
第 100 頁
 To protect important pictures from accidental
 若要防止重要的相片意外被刪除,必須啟動
Previous Page
Next Page
deletion, activate the image protection. page 97
影像保護。第 97 頁
 Protected image cannot be deleted.
 無法刪除受保護的影像。
98
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Deleting All Images at Once
立即刪除所有影像
Steps from 1 to 5 are the same as described in p.98.
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Delete All>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 A message <Delete all?> is displayed.
6
7. Move the [Joystick] left or right to
select <Yes> or <No>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
第 1 至 5 步驟與第 98 頁中的說明相同。
8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Notes
 You can directly access the Delete All function
by using the [QUICK MENU]. page 27
 Deleting all files using the Delete All menu
may take a while. To delete all files much
faster, format the Memory Card after backing
up the files onto other storage device.
page 100
Move
7
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Delete All>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 一則訊息 <Delete all?> 將會顯示。
M.Player Mode
►Memory
Delete
Delete All
Protect
Print Mark
Format
7. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes> 或
<No>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
8. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
OK Select
MENU Exit
附註
Photo

100-0001
[1/10]

Delete all?
Yes
Previous Page
No
您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取
Delete All 功能。第 27 頁
使用全部刪除選單來 Delete All 檔案可能需要
一段時間。若要更快刪除所有檔案,請將檔案
備份到其他儲存裝置後格式化記憶卡。
第 100 頁
Next Page
99
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Formatting the Memory Card (Format)
格式化記憶卡(Format)
 The Format function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26
 Format 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 You can use the Format functions to completely delete all images and
 您可以使用 Format 功能來刪除記憶卡上的所有影像和選項,包括被保
options on the Memory Card, including protected images.
護的影像。
 The Format function restores the Memory Card to its initial state.
 Format 功能會將記憶卡還原為起始狀態。
Attention
注意
 If you execute the Format function, all images will be erased completely
 若您執行 Format 功能,所有影像將會完全被刪
and erased images cannot be recovered.
除,且刪除的影像將無法復原。
4
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
M.Player Mode
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
(Player)].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
►Memory
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 The thumbnail index of photo images appears.
Delete
If there are no recorded images on the Memory
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡內沒
Delete All
Card, <No file!> is displayed.
有錄製影像,<No file!> 會顯示。
Protect
►Off
3. Press the [MENU] button.
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
Print Mark
►All Off
 The menu list will appear.
選單清單將會顯示。

Format
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Memory>,
<Memory>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Move OK Select MENU Exit
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Format>,
<Format>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 The <Format? All files will be deleted!>
5
 <Format? All files will be deleted!> 訊息會
M.Player Mode
message will appear.
顯示。
►Memory
6. Move the [Joystick] to the left or right to select
6. 向左或向右移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Yes>,然後
Delete
<Yes>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
按
[Joystick(OK)]。
Delete All
 The <Complete!> message will appear when
 <Complete!> 訊息會於格式化完成後顯示。
Protect
formatting is completed.
7. 若要退出,請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
Print Mark
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
Format
Notes
附註
 You can directly access the Format function by
Move OK Select MENU Exit
 您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取
using the [QUICK MENU]. page 27
Format 功能。第 27 頁
 If you execute the Format function, all photo/
6
moving images will be erased completely and
 若您執行 Format 功能,所有靜態/動態影像將會完
Photo
erased photo/moving images cannot be recovered.
全被刪除,且刪除的靜態/動態影像將無法恢復。
100-0001
[1/10]
 Formatting the Memory Card using a different
 使用其他裝置來格式化記憶卡將造成記憶卡讀取
device will cause Memory Card read errors.
錯誤。
 Do not turn the power off in the middle of the
Format?
 請勿在格式化期間關閉電源。
All files will be deleted!
formatting.
 保護標籤設定為儲存的記憶卡將不會被格式化。
Yes
No
 A Memory Card with the protection tab set to save
第 90 頁
will not be formatted. page 90
 請勿在電腦上格式化記憶卡。Not formatted! 訊息
 Do not format the Memory Card on a PC.
將會顯示,若您插入在電腦上格式化的記憶卡。
Not formatted! message may appear if a Memory
Previous Page
Next Page
Card formatted on a PC is inserted.
100
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Recording Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card
 You can record moving images while in M.Cam
Mode. page 26
 You can record moving images with audio on the
Memory Card.
 The screen format of the moving image to be
recorded is 720x480.
錄製記憶卡上的動態影像(MPEG)



4
Saving Moving Images onto a Memory Card
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the Memory Card.
Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
Set the [Power] switch to [
(Camera)].
Press the [Start/Stop] button, the moving images
are recorded on a Memory Card in MPEG4.
 You can record a photo image on a Memory
Card by pressing the [PHOTO] button instead of
the [Start/Stop] button. page 94
5. Press the [Start/Stop] button to stop the recording.
將動態影像儲存到記憶卡上
REC  0:00:30
16 min
Recording time available on a Memory Card
Moving
Image
128MB
256MB
512MB
1GB
2GB
Approx.
8min
Approx.
16min
Approx.
32min
Approx.
64min
Approx.
120min






The DVD Camcorder supports memory cards ranging up to 2GB.
Recording time is limited to one minute if 16MB memory card (or less) is used.
Moving images that you recorded are saved in *.avi (avi 1.0) file format on the
Memory Card.
The moving images on a Memory Card are a smaller size and lower definition
than images on Disc.
The sound is recorded in stereo.
The following functions are not allowed in M.Cam Mode: DIS, Digital Zoom,
Fade, Program AE, Digital Effect, Color Nite.
While recording on a Memory Card, don’t insert or eject the disc as it may
record noise.
While recording on a Memory Card, don’t eject the Memory Card or it may
break the data on the Memory Card or Memory Card itself.
Turning the power off while accessing the Memory Card may damage the data
stored on the Memory Card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
插入記憶卡。
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
(Camera)]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕,動態影像將以 MPEG4 檔案
格式錄製到記憶卡上。
 按下 [PHOTO] 按鈕,而非 [Start/Stop] 按鈕,
您可以將靜態影像錄製到記憶卡。第 94 頁
5. 按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕開始錄製。
記憶卡中的可錄製時間
動態影像
Notes



您可以在 M.Cam Mode 下錄製動態影像。第 26 頁
您可以將動態影像和聲訊錄製到記憶卡上。
將錄製的動態影像的螢幕格式為 720x480。
128MB
256MB
512MB
1GB
2GB
大約
8分鐘
大約
16分鐘
大約
32分鐘
大約
64分鐘
大約
120分鐘
附註









DVD 攝錄放影機支援容量高達 2GB 的記憶卡。
如果使用 16MB 記憶卡(或更低)錄製時間僅限於一分鐘。
錄製的動態影像則會以 *.avi (avi 1.0) 檔案格式儲存在記憶卡上。
記憶卡上的動態影像比光碟上的影像具有更小的尺寸和更低的清晰度。
聲訊會以立體聲錄製。
以下功能無法在 M.Cam Mode下操作。DIS、Digital Zoom、Fade、
Program AE、Digital Effect、Color Nite。
在錄製到記憶卡時,請勿插入或退出光碟,因為會將噪音也同時錄製
進去。
在錄製到記憶卡時,請勿退出記憶卡,否則可能損毀記憶卡內的資料
或該卡。
在存取記憶卡時關閉電源,可能損毀儲存在記憶卡內的資料。
101
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Playing the Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card
 The moving images playback function works only in M.Player Mode.
page 26
 You can play the moving images stored on a Memory Card. Stereo audio is
played back at the same time.
 The moving images will look better when played back on a PC.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
3
Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index of photo images appears. If
there are no recorded images on the Memory Card,
the <No file!> message will appear.
Move the [Joystick] up to highlight the photo image
icon ( ), then move it right to highlight the moving
image icon ( ).
Use the [Joystick] to select the moving image that
you want to play, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 To display the previous six images, press the []
button.
 To display the next six images, press the []
button.
 You can control playback using the [],
[/] and [(Stop)] buttons.
播放記憶卡上的動態影像(MPEG)
動態影像播放功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

您可以播放記憶卡中的動態影像。 立體聲音訊會同時播放。

動態影像在電腦上播放效果較好。

1.
2.
Movie
100-0001
[1/10]
3.
4.
Previous Page





[MENU] and [QUICK MENU] buttons are not
available during moving image playback.
There may be broken or mosaic pictures while
playing the moving images, but it is not malfunction.
The moving images that you recorded on a Memory
Card in this Camcorder may not play on other manufacturer’s devices.
The moving images recorded by another DVD Camcorder may not play on
by this DVD Camcorder.
To playback moving images on a PC, the Video Codec (in the CD provided
with the DVD Camcorder) should be installed.
- You need Microsoft Windows Media Player Version 9 or higher version in
order to play moving images on the Memory Card on your PC.
- You can download the Microsoft Windows Media Player applied each
languages on Microsoft Website, “http://www.microsoft.com/windows/
windowsmedia/download/default.asp”.
Moving images recorded on memory card can not be played back on Macintosh.
102
附註
Notes

Next Page
設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡內沒
有錄製影像,<No file!> 訊息會顯示。
向上移動 [Joystick] 以反白顯示靜態影像圖示( ),
然後向右移動以反白顯示動態影像圖示( )。
使用 [Joystick] 選擇想要播放的動態影像,然後
按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
 要顯示前六個影像,請按住 [] 按鈕。
 要顯示下六個影像,請按住 [] 按鈕。
 您可以使用 []、[/] 和 [(Stop)]
按鈕控制播放。



 [MENU] 按鈕和 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕在動態影像播
放期間不可用。
 播放動態影像時可能會出現破損或馬賽克影像,這
並非故障。
 您錄製在記憶卡上的動態影像也許無法在其他製造
商的裝置上播放。
採用其他 DVD 攝錄放影機所錄製的動態影像可能無法在本 DVD 攝錄放影
機上播放。
若要在電腦上播放動態影像,必須安裝視訊轉碼器(提供於 DVD 攝錄
放影機隨附的光碟上)。
- 您必須擁有 Microsoft Windows Media Player 版本 9 或以上版本,
才可在電腦上播放記憶卡內的動態影像。
- 您可以從 Microsoft 網站下載各種語言版本的 Microsoft Windows
Media Player:http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/
download/default.asp。
錄製在記憶卡上的移動影像無法在 Macintosh 上播放。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Recording Still images onto a Memory Card during
DVD playback DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
播放 DVD 時錄製靜態影像至記憶卡 DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL
此功能僅限在 Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

如果您在播放 DVD 光碟時按下 [PHOTO] 按鈕,光碟停止而 DVD

中的影像會儲存於記憶卡中。
 This function works only in Player Mode. page 26
 If you press the [PHOTO] button during DVD disc playback, the
disc stops and the image on the DVD is saved on the Memory
Card.
3
Title List
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
2006/01/01
[1/9]
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 隨即出現縮圖索引螢幕。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index screen appears.
3. Use the [Joystick] to select a title scene to be
played, then press the [Joystick(OK)] or []
button.
 The selected scene will be played
continuously.
Previous Page
3. 使用 [Joystick] 選擇要播放的標題清單場景,
然後按下 [Joystick(OK)] 或 []。
 所選場景將連續播放。
Next Page
4. 按下 [PHOTO] 按鈕。
 相片影像已錄製到記憶卡上。
 在儲存影像期間,播放畫面將暫停,
而 OSD 將會顯示。(參看右圖)
4
4. Press the [PHOTO] button.
 The still image is recorded on the Memory
Card.
 During the time it takes to save an image,
the playback screen is paused and the OSD
is displayed.
Notes
 Still images copied from the DVD disc to the
Memory Card are saved in 640x480 format.
 The number of images you can save varies
depending on the image resolution.
附註
 SP 0:00:01
-RW
VR
001
 從 DVD 複製到記憶卡上的靜止影像,將會以
640x480 格式儲存。
 您可儲存的影像張數取決於影像解析度。
Photo capture
103
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Marking Images for Printing (Print Mark)
標記要列印的影像(Print Mark)
 The Print Mark function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26
 This DVD Camcorder supports the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
print format.
 You can automatically print images recorded on a Memory Card with
a printer supporting DPOF.
 Setting the Print Mark is only available when using a memory card.
 There are 2 ways to make a Print Mark.
3 Photo
- <This File>: You can set a print mark on the
100-0001
photo image displayed on the LCD Screen. It
can be set up to 999.
- <All Files>: To print 1 copy each of all of the
stored images.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 The thumbnail index of photo images
appears. If there are no recorded images on
the Memory Card, the <No file!> message
will appear.
3. Use the [Joystick] to search for the photo
image that you want to mark.
4. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Memory>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Print
Mark>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
7. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
desired option (All Off, All Files or This File),
then press the [Joystick(OK)].
8. If you select <This File>, move the [Joystick]
up or down to select the quantity, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
9. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
) and number of prints
 Print Mark icon(
are displayed.
104
Print Mark 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁

DVD 攝錄放影機支援 DPOF(數位列印順序格式)列印格式。

您可以使用支援 DPOF 的印表機來自動列印錄製在記憶卡上的

影像。
僅有使用記憶卡時才能設定列印標記。

製作列印標記的方式有 2 種:

- <This File>:您可以為顯示在 LCD 螢幕
上的相片影像設定列印標記。它可設定多
[1/10]
達 999 個。
- <All Files>:為所有儲存的影像各列印
一份。
Previous Page
8
M.Player Mode
►Memory
Delete
Delete All
Protect
Print Mark
Format
Move
9
Next Page
All Off
All Files
This File 005
OK Select
MENU Exit
Photo
100-0001
[1/10]
5
Previous Page
Next Page
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
 靜態影像的縮圖索引會顯示。如果記憶卡
內沒有錄製影像,<No file!> 訊息會
顯示。
3. 使用 [Joystick] 搜尋要標記的靜態影像。
4. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Memory>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Print Mark>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
7. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇想要的選
項(All Off、All Files 或 This File),然後
按下 [Joystick(OK)]。
8. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<This File>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
9. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
 列印標記圖示(
)和列印張數將會
顯示。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Digital Still Camera Mode
數位靜態相機模式
Removing the Print Mark
移除列印標記
To remove all Print Marks, select <All Off>.
To remove an individual file’s Print Mark, select the file and set
<This File> to <000>.
若要移除所有列印標記,請選擇 <All Off>。
若要移除個別檔案的列印標記,請選擇該檔案,然後將 <This File>
設定為 <000>。
Notes
 You can directly access the Print Mark function by using the
[QUICK MENU] button. page 27
 If the Print Mark is set to This File, you can set the number of
copies from 000 to 999.
 If the Print Mark is set to All Files, you can set the number of
copies to 1.
 The All Files option may require extended operation time
depending on the number of stored images.
 DPOF supporting printers are commercially available.
 Use the USB cable provided with the DVD Camcorder.
附註






您可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 按鈕直接存取 Print Mark 功能。
第 27 頁
如果列印標記設為 This File,您可將複印張數設定為從 000 到 999
的值。
若列印標記設定為 All Files 您可設定複印張數為 1。
視儲存的影像張數而定,All Files 選項可能需要更多的執行時間。
DPOF 支援印表機在市面上可買到。
使用 DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的 USB 纜線。
105
ENGLISH
臺 灣
PictBridge™
PictBridge™
Printing Your Pictures-Using the PictBridge™
列印相片-使用 PictBridge™

 PictBridge function works only in M.Player Mode. page 26

 By connecting the DVD Camcorder to printers with PictBridge
support (sold separately), you can send images from the Memory

Card directly to the printer with a few simple operations.
 With the PictBridge Support, you can control the printer directly
through your DVD Camcorder in order to print
out stored pictures. For direct printing of your
4
stored pictures using the PictBridge function,
M.Player Mode
►System
you must connect your DVD Camcorder to a
Clock Set
PictBridge printer using a USB cable.
Beep Sound
USB Connect
Language
Connecting To a Printer (USB Connect)
1. Turn your printer power off.
 Turn your DVD Camcorder on by setting the
[Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
(Player)].
 Move the [Joystick] to select an image to
print.
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <USB Connect>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Printer>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
 <Computer>: Connect to a computer.
 <Printer>: Connect to a printer. (To use the
<Pict Bridge> function, select this.)
7. Connect your DVD Camcorder to the printer
using the provided USB cable.
8. Turn your printer power on.
 The <Pict Bridge> menu screen appears
automatically after a short period.
 The cursor highlights <Print>.
106
Move
5
8
MENU Exit
Computer
Printer
OK Select
M.Player Mode
►Pict Bridge
Print
Copies
Date/Time
Previous
►On
►Computer
►English
OK Select
M.Player Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
USB Connect
Language
Move
PictBridge 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
將 DVD 攝錄放影機連接到 PictBridge 支援(另購)的印表機,可進行
幾個簡單操作,將影像從記憶卡直接傳送到印表機。
使用 PictBridge 支援的印表機,即可經由 DVD 攝錄放影機直接控制
印表機列印儲存的相片。若要使用 PictBridge 功能直接列印儲存的相
片,您必須使用 USB 纜線將 DVD 攝錄放影機連接到
PictBridge 印表機。
MENU Exit
5/10
Next
連接印表機(USB 連接)
1. 關閉印表機電源。
 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD] 開啟您的 DVD
攝錄放影機。
(Player)]。
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
 移動 [Joystick] 選擇要列印的影像。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <System>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<USB Connect>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Printer>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 <Computer>:連接至電腦。
 <Printer>:連接至印表機。(若要使用
<Pict Bridge> 功能請選擇此項)
7. 使用隨附的 USB 纜線將 DVD 攝錄放影機連接到
印表機。
8. 開啟印表機電源。
 <Pict Bridge> 選單畫面會很快自動顯示。
 游標反白顯示 <Print>。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
PictBridge™
PictBridge™
Setting the Number of Prints
1. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Copies>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
2. Move the [Joystick] up or down to set the number
of prints, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
設定列印份數
2
Setting the Date/Time Imprint Option
3. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Date/Time>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
the Date/Time display type, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 Date/Time display type: <Off>, <Date>,
<Time>, <Date&Time>
Printing Images
Move the [Joystick] up or down to select <Print>,
then press the [Joystick(OK)], and selected image
files will be printed.
Canceling the Printing
5/10
M.Player Mode
►Pict Bridge
Print
Copies
Date/Time
001
設定日期/時間壓印選項
Previous
4
Next
M.Player Mode
►Pict Bridge
Print
Copies
Date/Time
5/10
Off
Date
Time
Date&Time
Previous
Next
Notes






The Date/Time Option may not be supported by all printers. Check with
your printer manufacturer. The Date/Time menu cannot be setup if the
printer does not support this option.
The PictBridge™ is a registered trademark of CIPA(Camera & Imaging
Products Association), an image transfer standard developed by Canon,
Fuji, HP, Olympus, Seiko Epson, and Sony.
PictBridge supporting printers are commercially available.
Use the USB cable provided with the DVD Camcorder.
Use the AC power adapter for your DVD Camcorder during PictBridge
Direct Printing. Turning your DVD Camcorder off during printing might
damage data on the Memory Card.
Printing photo images is supported. Moving images are not available for printing.
You can set various printing options depending on the printer.
Please refer to the user’s manual of the printer for details.
3. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Date/Time>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇日期/時間的顯
示類型,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
 日期/時間顯示類型:<Off>、<Date>、
<Time>、<Date&Time>。
影像列印
向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Print>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)],選擇的影像將被列印。
取消列印
若要取消影像列印,請再次按下 [Joystick(OK)] 按鈕。
一則 <Cancel> 訊息將會顯示,而影像列印也將取消。
To cancel the image printing, press [Joystick(OK)] button again.
The message <Cancel> appears and the image printing will be canceled.

1. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇 <Copies>,
然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
2. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以設定列印數目,然
後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
附註







並非所有印表機皆支援日期/時間壓印選項。請洽詢您的印表機製造
商。若印表機不支援此選項,Date/Time 選單可能無法設定。
PictBridge™ 是 CIPA(Camera & Imaging Products Association,相機
與影像產品協會)的註冊商標,是由 Canon、Fuji、HP、Olympus、
Seiko Epson 以及 Sony 所開發影像傳輸標準。
PictBridge 支援的印表機在市面上可買到。
使用 DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的 USB 纜線。
在 PictBridge 直接列印期間,使用 DVD 攝錄放影機的交流電變壓器。
在列印期間關閉 DVD 攝錄放影機電源,可能會損毀記憶卡上的資料。
支援列印靜態影像。不支援列印動態影像。
您可以設定的各種列印選項視印表機而定。
請參閱印表機使用者手冊。
107
ENGLISH
臺 灣
USB Interface
USB 介面
Using USB Interface
使用 USB 介面
Transferring a Digital Image through a USB Connection 透過 USB 連接傳輸數位影像
 The DVD Camcorder supports both USB 1.1 and 2.0 standards.
(Depends on the PC specification)
 You can transfer a recorded file in memory Card to a PC via a USB
connection.
 If you transfer data to a PC, you need to install the software
(DV Driver, Video Codec, DirectX 9.0) supplied with the DVD
Camcorder.
 DVD 攝錄放影機支援 USB 1.1 和 2.0 標準(視電腦規格而定)。
 您可以透過 USB 連接將記憶卡中的錄製檔案傳輸到個人電腦。
 若您傳輸資料到電腦,您將需要安裝 DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的軟體
(DV Driver、Video Codec、DirectX 9.0)。
USB Connection Speed depending on the System
USB 連接的速度取決於系統
High speed USB connection is supported by
Microsoft (Windows) device drivers only.
 Windows 98SE/ME - Full Speed USB
 Windows 2000 - High speed USB on a system
with Service Pack 4 or later installed.
 Windows XP- High speed USB on a system with
Service Pack 1 or later installed.
System Requirements
高速 USB 連接僅可由 Microsoft(Windows)
裝置驅動程式支援。
 Windows 98SE/ME - 全速 USB
 Windows 2000 - 安裝有 Service Pack 4 或
以上的系統可提供高速 USB。
 Windows XP - 安裝有 Service Pack 1 或以
上的系統可提供高速 USB。
系統需求
Windows System
Minimum
Recommended
CPU
Intel® Pentium III™, 600MHz
Intel® Pentium 4™, 2GHz
OS(Operating System)
Windows® 98SE/ME
Memory
Windows 系統
最低
建議
CPU
Intel® Pentium III™,600MHz
Intel® Pentium 4™,2GHz
Windows® 2000/XP
OS(作業系統)
Windows® 98SE/ME
Windows®
2000/XP
128MB
512MB
記憶體
128MB
512MB
HDD capacity
1GB or more
2GB or more
HDD 容量
1GB 或以上
2GB 或以上
Resolution
1024 x 768 dots 24bit Color
1024 x 768 dots 24bit Color
解析度
1024 x 768 點 24 位元色
1024 x 768 點 24 位元色
USB
USB1.1
USB2.0 High Speed
USB
USB1.1
USB2.0 高速


USB interface between the DVD Camcorder and a Mac is not
possible.
Operations is not guaranteed for all of the recommended computer
environments mentioned above.
108


不可使用 USB 作為 DVD 攝錄放影機和 Mac 的介面。
我們並不保證上述建議的電腦環境皆能正常操作。
ENGLISH
USB Interface
Notes
 On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may not be
smooth or video editing may take a long time.
 On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may skip
frames or operate unexpectedly.
 Intel® Pentium III™ or Pentium 4™ is a trademark of the Intel
Corporation.
 Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft® Corporation.
 All other brands and names are property of their respective owners.
 In M.Cam Mode or M.Player Mode, be sure that the Memory Card
is inserted into the DVD Camcorder before connecting USB cable.
If no Memory Card or an unformatted Memory Card is inserted, PC
will not recognize your DVD Camcorder as a removable disk.
 USB Streaming requires Video Codec, DV Driver and DirectX 9.0.
 If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the DVD
Camcorder during the data transfer, the data transfer will stop and
the data may be damaged.
 If you connect the USB cable to a PC using a USB HUB or with
other devices at the same time, it may cause conflict and may not
work properly. If this occurs, remove all other USB devices and try
the connection again.
臺 灣
USB 介面
附註









在比較慢的電腦上,影片播放可能不順暢或視訊編輯可能需要較
長時間。
在比較慢的電腦上,影片播放可能會跳幀或未能如常操作。
Intel® Pentium III™ 或 Pentium 4™ 是 Intel Corporation 的商標。
Windows® 是 Microsoft® 的註冊商標。
所有其他品牌和名稱是他們各自所有者的財產。
在 M.Cam Mode 或 M.Player Mode 中,請確定連接 USB 纜線前
已將記憶卡插入 DVD 攝錄放影機。若沒有放入或放入了未格式化
的記憶卡,電腦不會把 DVD 攝錄放影機識別為可卸式磁碟。
USB 串流需要 Video Codec、DV Driver 和 DirectX 9.0。
若您在資料傳輸期間從電腦或 DVD 攝錄放影機拔下 USB 纜線,
資料傳輸會停止,而資料可能損壞。
若您使用 USB 集線器或和其他裝置同時將 USB 纜線連接到電
腦,將可能造成衝突並無法正確操作。若發生這種情形,請移除
所有其他 USB 裝置,然後再嘗試連接。
109
ENGLISH
臺 灣
USB Interface
USB 介面
Selecting the USB Device (USB Connect)
選擇 USB 裝置(USB Connect)
 The USB Connect function works only in M.Player Mode.
page 26
 Using the USB cable, you can connect your DVD Camcorder to a
computer to copy your moving images and photo images from the
Memory Card, or to a printer to print your images.
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD].
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
4
(Player)].
3. Press the [MENU] button.
 The menu list will appear.
4. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<System>, then press the [Joystick(OK)].
5. Move the [Joystick] up or down to
select <USB Connect>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
6. Move the [Joystick] up or down to select
<Computer> or <Printer>, then press the
[Joystick(OK)].
 You can select <Computer> to use the
DVD Camcorder as a PC Camera, USB
Stream or removable disk.
 You can select <Printer> to use the PictBridge
feature. page 106
7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.
110
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD]。
M.Player Mode
►System
Clock Set
►On
Beep Sound
USB Connect ►Computer
►English
Language
Move
5
 USB Connect 功能僅限在 M.Player Mode 下操作。第 26 頁
 您可以使用 USB 纜線將 DVD 攝錄放影機連接至電腦以從記憶卡
複製動態影像和相片影像;或者連接至印表機以列印影像。
OK Select
M.Player Mode
►System
Clock Set
Beep Sound
USB Connect
Language
Move
MENU Exit
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Player)]。
3. 按下 [MENU] 按鈕。
 選單清單將會顯示。
4. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<System>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
5. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<USB Connect>,然後按 [Joystick(OK)]。
Computer
Printer
OK Select
MENU Exit
6. 向上或向下移動 [Joystick] 以選擇
<Computer> 或 <Printer>,然後按
[Joystick(OK)]。
 您可以選擇 <Computer> 以將 DVD 攝錄
放影機用作 PC 相機、USB 串流或可卸式
磁碟。
 您也可以選擇 <Printer> 以使用
PictBridge 功能。第 106 頁
7. 若要退出請按 [MENU] 按鈕。
ENGLISH
USB Interface
Installing DV Media PRO Program
臺 灣
USB 介面
安裝 DV Media PRO Program
 You need to install DV Media PRO Program to play back movie
files recorded by the DVD Camcorder on your PC.
 要在您的電腦上播放以 DVD 攝錄放影機錄製的影片檔案,您必須
安裝 DV Media PRO Program。
Before your start!
 Turn on your PC. Exit all other running applications.
 Insert the provided CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The setup screen appears automatically soon after the CD is
inserted. If the setup screen does not appear, click on “Start” on
the bottom left corner and select “Run” to display a dialog. Type
“D:\autorun.exe” and then press ENTER, if your
CD-ROM drive is mapped to “D:Drive”.
開始使用之前!
 開啟電腦。結束所有正在執行的其他應用程式。
 將隨附的光碟片放入 CD-ROM 光碟機。
安裝畫面會在放入光碟片之後立即自動顯示。 如果安裝畫面沒有
顯示,請按下左下方的
「Start」(開始)並選擇「Run」(執行)以顯示對話方塊。 鍵
入 「D:\autorun.exe」然後按下 ENTER (如果)CD-ROM 光碟
機對應到「D:Drive」(D:光碟機)。
Installing Driver - DV Driver and DirectX 9.0
 DV Driver is a software driver that is required to support
establishing connection to a PC.
(If it is not installed, some functions will not be supported.)
1. Click on <DV Driver> on the Setup screen.
 Driver software is installed automatically. Following drivers will
be installed:
- USB Removable disk driver (Windows 98 SE only)
- USB PC-CAMERA driver
2. Click on <Confirm> to finish driver installation.
 Windows 98 SE users need to restart Windows.
3. If the <DirectX 9.0> is not installed, it is installed automatically
after setting <DV Driver>.
 After installing <DirectX 9.0>, please restart your PC.
 If <DirectX 9.0> is installed already, there is no need to restart
the PC.
安裝驅動程式 - DV Driver 和 DirectX 9.0
 DV Driver 是與電腦建立連接時所需的一個軟體驅動程式。
(若未安裝,一些功能將不被支援。)
1. 在「安裝」畫面上按一下 <DV Driver>。
 所需的驅動程式軟體將會自動安裝:將安裝以下的驅動程式:
- USB 可卸式磁碟驅動程式(僅限 Windows 98 SE)
- USB PC-CAMERA 驅動程式
2. 按一下 <Confirm> 完成驅動程式安裝。
 Windows 98 SE 使用者需要重新啟動 Windows。
3. 如果 <DirectX 9.0> 未安裝,它會在 設定 <DV Driver> 後自動
安裝。
 安裝 <DirectX 9.0> 後,請重新啟動 PC。
 若已安裝 <DirectX 9.0>,則不需要重新啟動電腦。
Application Installation - Video Codec
 Click on <Video Codec> on the Setup screen.
<Video Codec> is required to play movie files recorded by this
DVD Camcorder on a PC.
應用程式安裝 - Video Codec
在安裝螢幕上,按一下 <Video Codec>。
您需要配備 <Video Codec> 以在電腦上播放 DVD 攝錄放影機錄
製的影片檔案。

111
ENGLISH
USB Interface
Application Installation – Photo Express
1. Click <Photo Express> on the Setup screen.
 It is a photo editing tool that allows users to edit images.
Application Installation – Quick Time
1. Click <Quick Time> on the Setup screen.
 QuickTime is Apple’s technology for handling movie, sound,
animation, graphics, text, music, and even 360-degree virtual
reality (VR) scenes.
Notes
 Please install by using the Software CD that came with this DVD
Camcorder.
We do not guarantee compatibility for different CD versions.
 For photo editing, use Photo Express.
 For movie playback on a PC, install software in this order:
DV Driver - DirectX 9.0 - Video Codec
 For PC Cam use, DV Driver installation is required.
 You have to install DV Driver, Video Codec and DirectX 9.0 to run
DV Media Pro properly.
 If a message saying “Digital Signature not found” or something
similar appears, ignore the message and continue with the
installation.
112
臺 灣
USB 介面
應用程式安裝 – Photo Express
1. 在安裝畫面上按一下 <Photo Express>。
 它是一個相片編輯工具,可以讓使用者編輯影像。
應用程式安裝 – Quick Time
1. 在安裝畫面上按一下 <Quick Time>。
 QuickTime 是 Apple 研發的一項技術,用於處理影片、聲音、
動畫、圖形、文字、音樂,甚至是 360 度虛擬實境 (VR) 場景。
附註






請使用 DVD 攝錄放影機隨附的軟體光碟進行安裝。
我們不保證不同光碟版本的相容性。
要編輯相片,請使用 Photo Express。
若要在電腦上播放影片,請依下列順序安裝軟體:DV Driver DirectX 9.0 - Video Codec
若要使用電腦相機,必須安裝 DV Driver。
您需要安裝 DV Driver、Video Codec 及 DirectX 9.0 以正確執行
DV Media Pro。
若顯示一則「Digital Signature not found」訊息或其他類似訊息,
請忽略該訊息並繼續進行安裝。
ENGLISH
USB Interface
Connecting to a PC
臺 灣
USB 介面
連接至電腦
1. Connect a USB cable to the
USB jack on the PC.
2. Connect the other end of the
USB cable into the USB jack
on the DVD Camcorder. (USB
jack)
 If a PC is connected to the
DVD Camcorder with a
USB cable, only [Power]
switch, [Mode] switch,
[Zoom] lever can be
operated.
1. 將 USB 纜線連接到電腦上的
USB 插孔。
2. 將 USB 纜線的另一端連接到
DVD 攝錄放影機上的 USB 插
孔。(USB 插孔)
 若使用 USB 將電腦連接
到 DVD 攝錄放影機,只有
[Power] 開關、[Mode] 開
關、[Zoom] 桿可以操作。
Disconnecting the USB Cable
拔下 USB 纜線
 After completing the data transmission, you must disconnect the
cable in the following way:
 在完成資料傳輸後,您必須使用以下方式拔下纜線:
1. Select the removable disc icon and click the right mouse button to
select “Eject”.
2. Select “Confirm” and disconnect the USB cable when the Windows
Splash screen appears.
Notes
 If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the DVD
Camcorder while transferring, the data transmission will stop and
the data may be damaged.
 If you connect the USB cable to a PC via a USB HUB or
simultaneously connect the USB cable along with other USB
devices, the DVD Camcorder may not work properly. If this occurs,
remove all USB devices from the PC and reconnect the DVD
Camcorder.
 You should set the USB Connect to Computer to connect to a PC
via USB cable. page 110
1. 選擇可卸式磁碟圖示,然後按一下滑鼠右鍵選擇「Eject」(退
出)。
2. 選擇「Confirm」(確認)並在 Windows 啟始畫面出現時拔下
USB 纜線。
附註



若您在傳輸期間從個人電腦或 DVD 攝錄放影機拔下 USB 纜線,
資料傳輸會停止,而資料可能損壞。
若您透過 USB 集線器將 USB 纜線連接到個人電腦或同時與其他
USB 裝置連接 USB 纜線, DVD 攝錄放影機可能無法正確操作。
若發生這種情況,請從電腦卸下所有 USB 裝置並重新連接 DVD
攝錄放影機。
您應該將 USB Connect 設定為 Computer 以便透過 USB 電纜連
接至 PC。第 110 頁
113
ENGLISH
臺 灣
USB Interface
USB 介面
Using the PC Camera Function
使用 PC 相機功能
 This function works only in Camera Mode. page 26
 To use the PC Camera function, the DV Driver, Video Codec and
DirectX 9.0 programs must be installed in the PC.
 You can use this DVD Camcorder as a PC Camera.
 When you connect to a Web site that provides video chatting
functions, you can use your DVD Camcorder for such functions.
 When using this DVD Camcorder for video conferencing (such
as NetMeeting), voice communication may not be supported
depending on the video conferencing software. In this case,
connect an external microphone to the soundcard of the PC to
enable voice communication.
 Using the DVD Camcorder with PC Net-meeting program installed,
you can participate in a video conference.
 The PC Camera’s screen size (Transferred video frame rate for the
PC Camera function is max 15 fps.)
1
- 640X480(VGA) pixels for USB 2.0
connection.
 If PC is connected with the USB to the DVD
Camcorder, only the [Power] switch, [Mode]
switch, [Zoom] lever can be operated.
功能僅限在Camera Mode下操作。第 26 頁
 此
要使用 PC 相機功能,DV Driver、Video Codec 和 DirectX 9.0

程式必須安裝在電腦上。
 您可以將此 DVD 攝錄放影機當作 PC 相機使用。
 當連接到提供視訊聊天功能的網站時,您可以使用 DVD 攝錄放影
機的這類功能。
 將此 DVD 攝錄放影機用來進行視訊會議時(如 NetMeeting),
支援語音通訊與否取決於視訊會議軟體。在此情況下,必須將外
接式麥克風連接到電腦的音效卡以啟用語音通訊。
 您可以使用安裝有電腦 Net-meeting 程式的 DVD 攝錄放影機來參
加視訊會議。
 電腦相機的螢幕大小(電腦相機功能的視訊傳輸幀率最大為 15
fps。)
- 用於 USB 2.0 連接的 640X480(VGA)像素。
 若使用 USB 將電腦連接到 DVD 攝錄放影機,
只有 [Power] 開關、[Mode] 開關、[Zoom] 桿
可以操作。
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [DISC].
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [DISC]。
2. Set the [Power] switch to [
2. 設定 [Power] 開關為 [
(Camera)].
3. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB
jack on the DVD Camcorder and the other end
to the USB connector on your computer.
114
2
(Camera)]。
3. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到 DVD 攝錄放影機
上的 USB 插孔,將另一端連接到您電腦上的
USB 連接器。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
USB Interface
USB 介面
Using the USB Streaming Function
使用 USB 串流功能
 This function works in both Camera Mode and Player Mode.
page 26
 To use USB streaming, the DV Driver, Video Codec and
DirectX 9.0 programs must be installed in the PC.
 You can view DVD Camcorder video on your PC using USB
streaming.
 You can also store it as a moving image in the “avi” file format on a
PC.
 這項功能可在 Camera Mode 和 Player Mode 下操作。
第 26 頁
 要使用 USB 串流,您必須在電腦上安裝 DV Driver、
Video Codec 和 DirectX 9.0 程式。
 您可以使用 USB 串流在電腦上檢視 DVD 攝錄放影機視訊。
 您還可以使用「avi」檔案格式將它作為移動影像儲存在 PC 上。
1. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the DVD
Camcorder and the other end to the USB jack on your computer.
2. 安和行 Windows Movie Maker。
 Windows Movie Maker 提供給 Windows ME 和 XP 使用者使
用。(C:\program files\Movie maker\moviemk.exe)
2. Setup and execute Windows Movie Maker.
 Windows Movie Maker is used for Windows ME and XP users.
(C:\program files\Movie maker\moviemk.exe)
1. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到 DVD 攝錄放影機上的 USB 插孔,
將另一端連接到您電腦上的 USB 插孔。
Using the removable Disk Function
使用可卸式磁碟功能
 You can easily transfer data from a Memory Card to a PC without
additional cards via a USB connection.
 您可以在不必使用其他介面卡的情況下,透過 USB 連接輕鬆地將
資料從記憶卡傳輸到電腦。
1. Set the [Mode] switch to [CARD], set the [Power] switch to
[
(Camera)] or [
(Player)].
1. 設定 [Mode] 開關為 [CARD],設定 [Power] 開關為
[
(Camera)] 或 [
(Player)]。
2. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the DVD
Camcorder and the other end to the USB jack on your computer.
2. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到 DVD 攝錄放影機上的 USB 插孔,
將另一端連接到您電腦上的 USB 插孔。
3. To verify whether the removable disk has been properly recognized,
open Windows Explorer and locate the removable disk.
3. 要確認可卸式磁碟是否已被正確識別,請開啟 Windows 檔案總
管,然後尋找可卸式磁碟。
115
ENGLISH
Maintenance
Using Your DVD Camcorder Abroad
 Each country or region has its own electric and color systems.
 Before using your DVD Camcorder abroad, check the following
items.
Power sources


You can use your DVD Camcorder in any country or area with the
supplied AC Power adapter within 100V to 240V, 50/60 Hz.
Use a commercially available AC jack adapter, if necessary,
depending on the design of the local wall outlet.
Color system
You can view your recordings using the built-in LCD screen and
viewfinder.
However, to view your recordings on a television set or to copy
it to an external device as a video cassette recorder (VCR)/DVD
Recorder / Player, the television set or an external device must
be NTSC-compatible and have the appropriate Audio/Video jacks.
Otherwise, you may need to use a separate Video Format Transcoder
(NTSC-PAL format Converter).
PAL-compatible Countries/Regions
Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, China, CIS, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Great Britain,
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, India, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Libya,
Malaysia, Mauritius, Norway, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Singapore,
Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Thailand,
Tunisia, etc.
NTSC-compatible Countries/Regions
Bahamas, Canada, Central America, Japan, Korea, Mexico,
Philippines, Taiwan, United States of America, etc.
Note
You can make recordings with your DVD Camcorder and view
pictures on the LCD Screen from anywhere in the world.
116
臺 灣
維護
在國外使用 DVD 攝錄放影機
 每個國家或地區都有自己的電源和彩色系統。
在國外使用 DVD 攝錄放影機之前,請檢查以下各項:

電源


您可以在電源輸入範圍介於 100V 至 240V,50/60 Hz 的任何國家
或地區,透過隨附的交流電源變壓器使用 DVD 攝錄放影機。
根據當地的牆上插座設計,如有必要,請使用市面上提供的交流
電源適配器。
彩色系統
您可以使用內建 LCD 螢幕和觀景窗來檢視錄製內容。
然而,如果要在電視機上檢視錄製內容或將它複製到錄放影機 (VCR)/
DVD 錄影機/播放器等外部裝置上,電視機或外部裝置必須與 NTSC
相容,並具備適當的音訊視訊插孔。
否則,您必須使用個別購買的視訊格式轉碼器(NTSC-PAL 格式
轉換器)。
PAL 相容的國家/地區
澳洲、奧地利、比利時、保加利亞、中國、CIS 國家、捷克、丹麥、
埃及、芬蘭、法國、德國、希臘、英國、荷蘭、香港、匈牙利、
印度、伊朗、伊拉克、科威特、利比亞、馬來西亞、模里西斯、
挪威、羅馬尼亞、沙烏地阿拉伯、新加坡、斯洛伐克、西班牙、
瑞典、瑞士、敘利亞、泰國、突尼西亞等。
NTSC 相容的國家/地區
巴哈馬、加拿大、中美洲、日本、韓國、墨西哥、菲律賓、台灣、
美國等。
附註
您可以在全球各地使用您的 DVD 攝錄放影機進行錄製及在 LCD 螢幕
上檢視相片。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
故障排除
Troubleshooting
故障排除
 Before contacting a Samsung authorized service center, perform the
following simple checks.
They may save you the time and expense of an unnecessary call.
 在聯絡三星授權的維修中心之前,請執行下列的簡單檢查。
這將可節省不必要的電話時間和費用。
Self Diagnosis Display in <Camera/Player> Modes
<Camera/Player> 模式下的自我診斷顯示
Display
No disc!
?
error
Blinking Informs that...
Action
Slow
The Battery Pack is almost
discharged.
Change to a charged one.
There is no disc in DVD
Camcorder.
Insert a disc.
Change to a new disc.
Erase recorded image.
Slow
Disc full!
Slow
There is not enough memory
to record.
Bad Disc!
Slow
Inserted disc is not recognized Eject and re-insert the disc.
by the DVD Camcorder.
Try another disc.
Format the disc. (DVD-RW/+RW)
Slow
The disc is finalized.
Finalized disc!
Cover is opened!
Slow
Cover is opened.
顯示
?
error


What is Dew Condensation?
Dew condensation happens when a DVD camcorder is moved to a place where there is
a significant temperature difference from the previous place. In other words, the water
vapor in the air turns into dew because of the temperature difference, and it condensates
like dew on the external or internal lenses of the DVD camcorder and on the reflection
lens and the surface of the disc which are related to playback. When this happens, you
temporarily may not use the record or play functions of the DVD camcorder. Also, it may
cause a malfunction or damage to the DVD camcorder when using the device with the
power on while there is dew condensation.
What can I do?
Turn the power off and detach the battery pack, and leave it in a dry area for
1~2 hours before using it.
When does the dew condensation occur?
When the device is relocated to a place with a higher temperature than the previous
location, or when using it in a hot area suddenly, it will cause condensation.
1) When recording outside in cold weather during the winter and then using it
in indoors.
2) When recording outside in hot weather after being indoors or inside a car
where the AC was running.
操作
電池組幾乎完全放電。
更換已充電的電池。
No disc!
緩慢
DVD 攝錄放影機中沒有
光碟。
插入光碟。
Disc full!
緩慢
沒有可供錄製的足夠記
憶體。
更換新的光碟。
刪除錄製的影像。
Bad Disc!
緩慢
若插入的光碟無法被
DVD 攝錄放影機識別。
退出並且重新插入光碟。
嘗試另一張光碟。
格式化光碟 (DVD-RW/+RW)
緩慢
光碟片已經終結。
若使用 DVD-RW 光碟,請取
消終結化。
緩慢
光碟蓋開啟。
關閉光碟蓋。
Cover is opened!
Close the cover.
Caution

表示…
緩慢
Finalized disc!
To record on a DVD-RW disc,
unfinalize it.
When there is dew condensation, put aside for a while before using
閃爍
注意
當機內有霧氣凝結時,請先晾置一旁一段時間再使用



什麼是霧氣凝結?
當視訊相機移至一個溫度與之前的地方差異很大的地點時,會造成霧氣
凝結。
換句話說,空氣中的水氣因為氣溫的變化而凝結,並會在視訊相機的外
部或內部鏡頭以及在反射鏡和光碟表面凝結成水珠。 發生此情形時,
您將暫時無法使用視訊相機的錄製或播放功能。
發生霧氣凝結時若仍開啟電源使用視訊相機,將可能造成裝置故障或損壞。
該如何處理?
關閉電源並卸下電池組,並在使用前先晾置於乾燥的地方 1 至 2 小時。
什麼時候會發生霧氣凝結?
當裝置被移動放置到一個比先前放置地點溫度高的地方,或是突然在炎
熱的地方使用裝置,都會造成霧氣凝結。
1) 冬天時在室外寒冷的氣溫下使用裝置進行錄製,隨後又在室內使用
裝置。
2) 裝置從有冷氣的室內或車內拿到炎熱的室外進行錄製。
117
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
故障排除
Self Diagnosis Display in <M.Cam/M.Player> Modes
<M.Cam/M.Player> 模式下的自我診斷顯示
Display
No
memory
card!
Memory
card full
Blinking
Informs that...
Slow (M.Cam) There is no Memory
- (M.Player) Card in the DVD
Camcorder.
Slow
There is not enough
memory to record.
顯示
No memory
card!
Memory
card read
error
Slow
Memory
card write
error
Slow
Not
Slow
formatted!
No file!
-
118
Action
Insert a Memory
Card.
Change to a new
Memory Card.
Erase recorded
image.
The DVD Camcorder Format a Memory
can not playback.
Card or insert
a Memory Card
recorded on this
DVD Camcorder.
The DVD Camcorder Format a Memory
can not record.
Card or change
to a new Memory
Card.
The Memory Card
Format a Memory
needs to format.
Card. page 100
There are no images Record new
recorded on the
images.
Memory Card.
Memory card
full
Memory card
read error
閃爍
表示…
緩慢 (M.Cam) DVD 攝錄放影
- (M.Player) 機內沒有記憶
卡。
緩慢
沒有可供錄製的
足夠記憶體。
緩慢
DVD 攝錄放影
機無法播放。
Memory card 緩慢
write error
Not formatted! 緩慢
No file!
-
操作
插入記憶卡。
更換新的記憶卡。
刪除錄製的影像。
格式化記憶卡或將
插入使用本 DVD
攝錄放影機錄製的
記憶卡。
DVD 攝錄放影 格式化記憶卡或更
機無法錄製。
換新的記憶卡。
記憶卡需要格式 格式化記憶卡。
化。
第 100 頁
記憶卡內沒有已 錄製新的影像。
錄製的影像。
ENGLISH
Troubleshooting
臺 灣
故障排除
 If these instructions do not solve your problem, contact your
nearest Samsung authorized service center.
 若這些指示不能解決問題,請就近與三星授權的維修中心聯絡。
Symptom
Explanation/Solution
You cannot switch the  Check the Battery Pack or the AC Power
adapter.
DVD Camcorder on.
 You have left the DVD Camcorder set to
STBY for more than 5 minutes without
The DVD
using it. To turn on the DVD Camcorder,
Camcorder shuts off
press the [Start/Stop] button.
automatically.
 The Battery Pack is fully exhausted.
Replace it with a fully charged battery pack.
 The atmospheric temperature is too low.
Charge runs out
 The Battery Pack has not been charged fully.
quickly.
 The Battery Pack is completely dead, and
cannot be recharged, use another Battery Pack.
 The contrast between the subject and
A vertical strip
the background is too great for the DVD
Camcorder to operate normally. Make the
appears on the screen
when recording a dark
background bright to reduce the contrast
background.
or use the BLC function while you are
recording in bright Surroundings.
 The Viewfinder lens has not been adjusted.
The image in the
 Adjust the Viewfinder control lever until
Viewfinder is blurred.
the indicators displayed on the Viewfinder
come into sharp focus.
 Check the Manual Focus menu.
Auto focus does not
 Auto focus does not work in the Manual
work.
Focus mode.
When the power is
 If the DC Adapter is connected, remove
turned off and then
the cord, turn on the Power switch, and
turned on, a blue
then connect it again. If the battery is
screen appears instead
connected, disconnect it, turn the Power
of the normal screen.
switch to on, and then connect it again.
狀況
您無法啟動 DVD 攝
錄放影機。
DVD 攝錄放影機自
動關閉。
電池電量很快耗盡。
在昏暗的背景中錄製
時,螢幕上將會出現
垂直條紋。
觀景窗中的影像模
糊。
自動對焦無法操作。
關閉電源然後再開啟
時將出現藍色螢幕,
而不是正常螢幕。
說明/解決方案

檢查電池組或交流電源適配器。

您將 DVD 攝錄放影機設定為 STBY 超過
5 分鐘而沒有使用它。 若要開啟 DVD 攝
錄放影機,按下 [Start/Stop] 按鈕。
電池組已完全耗盡電力。 換上充滿電的電
池。
氣溫太低。
電池組並未完全充電。
電池組已完全損毀,並且無法重新充電,
請使用其他的電池組。
主體與背景之間的對比度太大,DVD 攝錄
放影機無法正常操作。當您在明亮的環境
中錄製時,加亮背景以降低對比度或使用
BLC(背光補償)功能。
觀景窗鏡頭尚未調整。
調整觀景窗控制桿直到觀景窗中的指示器
出現清晰的對焦。
檢查手動對焦選單。
自動對焦無法在手動對焦模式中操作。
如果已連接交流電變壓器,請先取下連接
線,開啟電源開關,然後再次連接。
如果已連接電池,先取下接線,開啟電源
開關,然後再次連接。










119
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
故障排除
Symptom
狀況
Pressing the
[Start/Stop] button
does not start
recording.
Explanation/Solution
 Check the [Power] switch is set to
[
(Camera)].
 There is not enough free space in the
disc. Replace the disc with a new one or
format the disc.
 Disc was finalized.
Make the disc writable to record additional
pictures.
 DVD Camcorder is too hot. Turn off the
power and cool it down a while.
Disc is not recognized

and the disc cover
opens.

Pressing the []
button does not start
playing.
120



The disc is a damaged one. Replace with
a new disc.
Check the [Power] switch is set to
[
(Player)].
Check the disc compatibility.
Check the disc was inserted properly
to face its writable side toward the DVD
Camcorder.
A disc with data that had been recorded
using other devices may not properly work
with this DVD Camcorder.
說明/解決方案
 檢查 [Power] 開關是否設為
[
(Camera)]。
按下 [Start/Stop]  光碟中沒有足夠的空間。更換新的光碟或格
按鈕卻未開始錄
式化光碟。
製。
 光碟已終結。
使光碟能夠重新寫入以錄製更多影像。
 DVD 攝錄放影機過熱。關閉電源使之冷卻。
光碟無法辨識,
 光碟片損壞。更換新的光碟。
光碟蓋打開。
按下 [] 按鈕
並未開始播放。




檢查 [Power] 開關是否設為 [
(Player)]。
檢查光碟的相容性。
檢查光碟插入方向是否為可寫入面朝向 DVD
攝錄放影機的正確方式。
含有以其他裝置錄製資料的光碟可能無法正
確的在本 DVD 攝錄放影機中操作。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
故障排除
Symptom
Explanation/Solution
狀況
說明/解決方案
Playback screen
interrupted
unexpectedly.

Check the Power supply (Battery
Pack or AC Power Adapter) is properly
connected and stable.
播放畫面意外中
斷。

檢查電源供應(電池組或交流電源適配
器)是否已正確穩固地連接。


A disc with data that had been recorded
using other devices may not properly
work with this DVD Camcorder.
A DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode
cannot be played back using a recorder
that does not support VR mode. Refer
to the user’s manual of playback device
to check compatibility.
無法播放錄製的
DVD-RW/+RW/
-R/+R DL 光碟。
含有以其他裝置錄製資料的光碟可能無法
正確的在本 DVD 攝錄放影機中操作。
以 VR 模式錄製的 DVD-RW 光碟無法使用
不支援 VR 模式的錄影機播放。請參閱播
放裝置的使用手冊查看相容性。
Cannot play back a
recorded DVD-RW/
+RW/-R/+R DL disc.
Cannot play back a
recorded DVD-RW/
+RW/-R/+R DL disc on
a PC.
Pushing the [OPEN]
switch does not open
the Disc Cover.
Cannot close the Disc
Cover.


無法在個人電腦播

放錄製的 DVD-RW/

-R/+R DL 光碟。



Clean the disc using a cleaning cloth.
Finalize the disc (except DVD+RW).

Check the Power supply (Battery
Pack or AC Power Adapter) is properly
connected and stable.
Detach the Battery Pack from the DVD
Camcorder and install it again.
Make sure the Battery Pack is charged.
Disc finalization was interrupted by
turning the DVD Camcorder off. Turn
the DVD Camcorder on, and take out
the disc after finalizing the disc.






按下 [OPEN] 開關
無法開啟光碟蓋。
無法關閉光碟蓋。




使用清潔布擦拭光碟。
終結光碟(DVD+RW 除外)。
檢查電源供應(電池組或交流電源適配
器)是否已正確穩固地連接。
從 DVD 攝錄放影機卸下電池組然後再重新
安裝。
確定電池組已充電。
光碟終結化因關閉 DVD 攝錄放影機而中
斷。開啟 DVD 攝錄放影機,在完成終結化
後取出光碟。
確定手提帶沒有纏繞住裝置。
確定光碟已正確插入。
Make sure the hand strap is not
entangled.
Make sure the disc was inserted
properly.
121
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
故障排除
Setting menu items
Main
Menu
Sub Menu
Record
Memory
Selecting the Program
AE Function


55
Setting the Digital special 
effect
57
16:9 Wide
Setting the 16:9 Wide
mode

59
DIS
Selecting the Digital
Image Stabilizing

60
Digital Zoom
Selecting Digital Zoom

61
Rec Mode
Selecting the recording
speed

AV In/Out 
Selecting the AV input/
output
Wind Cut
Minimizing wind noise
Photo Quality
Selecting Image Quality
Delete
Deleting Files

98

42

85
Camera
Record
50


92

Memory
子選單
功能
可用模式
Camera Player M.Cam M.Player 頁
Mode Mode Mode
Mode
Program AE
選擇程序自動曝光功能 
White Balance
設定白平衡

Digital Effect
設定數位特殊效果

57
16:9 Wide
設定 16:9 寬螢幕模式

59
DIS
選擇數位防手震功能

Digital Zoom
選擇數位縮放

60
61
Rec Mode
選擇錄製速度

AV In/Out 
選擇 AV 輸入/輸出
Wind Cut
最小化風聲噪音
Photo Quality
選擇影像品質
Delete
刪除檔案

98
Delete All
刪除所有檔案

99
Protect
防止記憶卡內容經意外
刪除

97
Print Mark
標記記憶卡中要列印的
影像

104

100
53
55


42

85
50


92

Delete All
Deleting all Files

99
Protect
Preventing Accidental
Erasure in Memory Card

97
Format
格式化記憶卡
Print Mark
Marking images recorded on
a Memory Card for Printing

104
File No.
檔案編號選項
終結光碟

Format
Formatting the Memory
Card
Disc Finalize
82

取消終結光碟

84
File No.
File Numbering Options
格式化光碟

Disc Finalize
Finalizing a Disc
Disc Info
提供光碟資訊


LCD Bright
設定 LCD 螢幕的亮度




36
LCD Color
設定 LCD 螢幕的色調




36
Date/Time
設定日期和時間顯示




37
100
93


82

84

81
Disc Info
Providing a Disc Information 

LCD Bright
Setting the Brightness
tone of the LCD Screen




36
LCD Color
Setting the Color tones of 
the LCD Screen



36
Date/Time
Setting the Date and
Time Display



37
: SC-DC165 only
122
主選單
53

Digital Effect
Disc Unfinalize Unfinalizing a Disc
Disc
Manager Disc Format
Formatting Disc
Display
Available Mode
Camera Player M.Cam M.Player Page
Mode Mode Mode
Mode
White Balance Setting White Balance
Program AE
Camera
Functions
設定選單項目

79
Disc Unfinalize
Disc
Manager Disc Format
Display
:僅限 SC-DC165
93

81
79
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Troubleshooting
Main
Menu
System
Sub Menu
Functions
故障排除
Available Mode
可用模式
Camera Player M.Cam M.Player Page
Mode Mode Mode
Mode


功能
Setting the date/time




30
Clock Set
設定日期/時間
Remote 
Using the remote control




31
Remote 
使用遙控器
Beep Sound
Setting the Beep sound

32
Beep Sound
設定嗶聲


Shutter Sound Setting the Shutter sound
USB Connect
Selecting the USB device
Language
Selecting the OSD
language

33




System Shutter Sound
110
USB Connect
選擇 USB 裝置

34
Language
選擇 OSD 語言
Demonstration
示範畫面

“Memory Stick” and “
” are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
All other product names mentioned herein may be the
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
Furthermore, “™” and “ ® ” are not mentioned in each
instance in this manual.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
35
頁
Camera Player M.Cam M.Player
Mode Mode Mode
Mode






設定快門聲響

: SC-DC164/DC165 only

子選單
Clock Set
Demonstration Demonstration

主選單











30
31
32
33


110
34
35
:僅限 SC-DC164/DC165

「Memory Stick」和「

本文件提及的所有其他產品名稱可能是其各別公司的商標或註冊
商標。
此外,本手冊的各項例子中並未提及「™」和「®」。


由 Dolby Laboratories 授權製造。
「杜比」、「Dolby」與雙D 標誌是 Dolby Laboratories 的商
標。
」是 Sony Corporation 的商標。
123
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Specifications
規格
Model Name: SC-DC163/DC164/DC165
機型名稱:SC-DC163/DC164/DC165
System
Video signal
Picture Compression format
Audio Compression format
Recording Quality
Image device
Lens
系統
視訊訊號
畫面壓縮格式
聲訊壓縮格式
錄製品質
影像裝置
Filter diameter
LCD Screen/Viewfinder
Size/dot number
LCD Screen Method
Viewfinder
Connectors
Video output
S-video output
Audio output
USB output
External Mic
General
Power source
Power source type
Power consumption
(Recording)
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
External dimension
Weight
Internal MIC
Remote control
(SC-DC164/DC165 only)
-
NTSC
MPEG-2
D O L B Y ® D I G I TA L S T E R E O C R E ATO R
XP (about 9Mbps), SP (about 6Mbps), LP (about 3Mbps)
CCD (Charge Coupled Device) (680k pixels)
F1.6 30x (SC-DC163), 33x (SC-DC164/DC165) (Optical),
1200x(Digital) Electronic zoom lens
Ø30
SC-DC163: 2.5inches 112k / SC-DC164/DC165: 2.7inches 230k
TFT LCD
Color LCD
1Vp-p (75Ω terminated)
Y: 1Vp-p, 75Ω, C: 0. 286Vp-p, 75Ω
-7.5dBs (600Ω terminated)
Mini-B type connector
Ø3.5 stereo
DC 8.4V, Lithium Ion Battery Pack 7.4V
Lithium Ion Battery Pack, Power supply (100V~240V) 50/60Hz
5.2W (SC-DC163, LCD/Viewfinder),
5.4W (SC-DC164/DC165, LCD/Viewfinder)
0˚~40˚C (32˚F~104˚F)
-20˚C ~ 60˚C (-4˚F ~ 140˚F)
Height 2.02 inches (51.5 mm), Length 3.44 inches (87.5 mm),
Width 4.78 inches (121.5 mm)
0.936 lb (425 g, 15.17 oz) (Except for Lithium Ion Battery Pack)
Omni-directional stereo microphone
Indoors: greater than 49 ft (15 m) (straight line),
Outdoors: about 16.4 ft (5 m) (straight line)
These technical specifications and design may be changed without
notice.
124
鏡頭
濾鏡直徑
LCD 螢幕/觀景窗
大小/點數
LCD 螢幕方法
觀景窗
連接器
視訊輸出
S-video 輸出
聲訊輸出
USB 輸出
外接式麥克風
一般資訊
電源
電源類型
耗電量(錄製)
操作溫度
存放溫度
外部尺寸
重量
內建麥克風
遙控器
(僅限 SC-DC164/
DC165)
NTSC
MPEG-2
D O L B Y ® D I G I TA L S T E R E O C R E ATO R
XP (約 9Mbps)、SP(約 6Mbps)、LP(約 3Mbps)
CCD(光電耦合元件)(68 萬像素)
F1.6 30x(SC-D163)、33x(SC-DC164/DC165)(光學)、
1200x(數位)電子縮放鏡頭
Ø30
SC-DC163: 2.5 英吋 112k / SC-DC164/DC165: 2.7 英吋 230k
TFT LCD
色彩 LCD
1Vp-p(75Ω 終端)
Y:1Vp-p,75Ω,C: 0. 286Vp-p,75Ω
-7.5dB(600Ω 終端)
Mini-B 類型連接器
Ø3.5 立體聲
直流電源 8.4V,鋰離子電池組 7.4V
鋰離子電池組,電源 (100V~240V) 50/60Hz
5.2W(SC-DC163、LCD/觀景窗),
5.4W(SC-DC164/DC165、LCD/觀景窗)
0˚~40˚C (32˚F~104˚F)
-20˚C ~ 60˚C (-4˚F ~ 140˚F)
高 2.02 英吋(51.5 公釐),長 3.44 英吋(87.5 公釐),
寬 4.78 英吋(121.5 公釐)
0.936 磅(425 公克,15.17 盎司)
(不包括鋰離子電池組和錄影帶)
多向麥克風
戶內:超過 49 英呎(15 公尺)(直線),
戶外:大約 16.4 英呎(5 公尺)(直線)
- 這些技術規格與設計如有變更,恕不另行通知。
- 本產品所用之 USB 線結合一只鐵芯做為抑制電磁波干擾用,請勿拆卸。
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Index
索引
-A-
Accessories ..................................................13
Add ...............................................................72
AF/MF ...........................................................52
AV In/Out ......................................................85
-BBeep Sound ..................................................32
BLC ..............................................................47
-CClock Set ......................................................30
Color Nite .....................................................48
Connection ...................................................85
Copying ...................................................88,89
-DDate/Time .....................................................37
Delete ...........................................................76
Deleting ..............................................67,71,98
Demonstration ..............................................35
Digital Effect .................................................57
Digital Zoom .................................................61
DIS................................................................60
Disc Cleaning .................................................7
Discs .............................................................10
-EEASY.Q Mode ..............................................44
Exposure ......................................................51
-FFade .............................................................46
File No. .........................................................93
Finalize .........................................................82
Format ...................................................81,100
Function buttons ...........................................15
-HHand Strap ...................................................19
-IInformation ...................................................79
-JJoystick .........................................................26
-LLCD ..............................................................36
LED Light ......................................................49
Lithium Ion Battery Pack ..............................21
-MMemory Card ................................................90
Memory Stick ................................................90
Microphone ...................................................45
Move .............................................................74
Moving Image .............................................101
-NName ............................................................80
-A配件 ................................................................13
Add(新增) ..................................................72
自動對焦/手動對焦 .........................................52
AV In/Out(AV 輸入/輸出) ...........................85
麥克風 ............................................................45
Move(移動) ................................................74
動態影像 .......................................................101
-N名稱 ................................................................80
-B-
-O-
Operating Modes ..........................................26
OSD .........................................................28,29
OSD Language .............................................34
Beep Sound(嗶聲) .....................................32
BLC(背光補償) ..........................................47
操作模式 .........................................................26
螢幕顯示 ....................................................28,29
畫面顯示語言 .................................................34
-P-
Clock Set(時鐘設定) ..................................30
Color Nite(色彩夜拍) .................................48
連接 ................................................................85
複製 ...........................................................88,89
-O-
Partial Delete ...........................................68,77
PB ZOOM .....................................................66
Photo images ...............................................95
Photo Quality ................................................92
PictBridge ...................................................106
Playlist ..........................................................62
Power Source ...............................................25
Print Mark ...................................................104
Program AE ..................................................53
Protection ....................................................97
-QQuick Menu ..................................................27
-RRecord Mode ................................................42
Remote .........................................................31
Remote control .............................................18
-SShutter Sound ..............................................33
Shutter Speed ..............................................51
-TThumbnail index ...........................................62
-C-
-DDate/Time(日期/時間) ................................37
Delete(刪除) ..............................................76
刪除中 ..................................................67,71,98
Demonstration(示範畫面) ..........................35
Digital Effect(數位效果) .............................57
Digital Zoom(數位縮放) .............................61
DIS(數位防手震功能) ................................60
光碟清潔 ...........................................................7
光碟 ................................................................10
-E簡易拍攝模式 .................................................44
Exposure(曝光)..........................................51
-PPartial Delete(部分刪除) .......................68,77
PB ZOOM(播放縮放) .................................66
相片影像 .........................................................95
Photo Quality(相片品質) ............................92
PictBridge .....................................................106
Playlist(播放清單) ......................................62
電源 ................................................................25
Print Mark(列印標記) ...............................104
Program AE(程序自動曝光) ......................53
保護 ................................................................97
-Q快速選單 .........................................................27
-R錄製模式 .........................................................42
Remote(遙控) ............................................31
遙控器 ............................................................18
-F-
-S-
Fade(淡化).................................................46
File No.(檔案編號) .....................................93
Finalize(終結) ............................................82
Format(格式化) ...................................81,100
功能按鈕 .........................................................15
Shutter Sound(快門聲響) ..........................33
快門速度 .........................................................51
-T縮圖索引 .........................................................62
-U-
-H-
-U-
Unfinalize ......................................................84
USB Interface ..................................... 108~115
手提帶 ............................................................19
Unfinalize(取消終結)..................................84
USB 介面 ..............................................108~115
-VViewfinder .....................................................38
-WWhite Balance ..............................................55
Wind Cut .......................................................50
-ZZoom ............................................................45
-I資訊 ................................................................79
-V-
-J-
觀景窗 ............................................................38
搖桿 ................................................................26
-W-
-L-
White Balance(白平衡) ..............................55
Wind Cut(風聲消減)...................................50
液晶顯示 .........................................................36
LED 燈 ............................................................49
鋰離子電池組 .................................................21
-Z縮放 ................................................................45
-M記憶卡 ............................................................90
Memory Stick ..................................................90
125
ENGLISH
臺 灣
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please
contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
SAMSUNG 國際聯絡
若閣下對Samsung產品有任何意見或疑問,歡迎聯絡Samsung客戶服務中心。
Region Country
Region Country
Customer
CANADA
North America MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
Latin America GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
Europe
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
RUSSIA
CIS
UKRAINE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
Asia Pacific
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
Middle East & VIETNAM
Africa
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Care Certre
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421
800-726-7864(SAMSUNG)
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-7267-864
1-800-100-5303
02 201 2418
844 000 844
38 322 887
09 693 79 554
08 25 08 65 65 (0,15€/Min)
01805 - 121213 (€ 0,12/Min)
06 40 985 985
199 153 153
02 261 03 710
0900 20 200 88 (€ 0.10/Min)
231 627 22
0 801 801 881
80 8 200 128
0850 123 989
902 10 11 30
08 585 367 87
0870 242 0303
8-800-200-0400
8-800-502-0000
1300 362 603
800-810-5858, 010- 6475 1880
2862 6001
3030 8282
1800 1100 11
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/ur
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com.cn
www.samsung.com/hk
Customer
CANADA
North America MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
Latin America GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
Europe
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
RUSSIA
CIS
UKRAINE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
HONG KONG
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
INDIA
Asia Pacific
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
Middle East & VIETNAM
Africa
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Care Certre
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421
800-726-7864(SAMSUNG)
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-7267-864
1-800-100-5303
02 201 2418
844 000 844
38 322 887
09 693 79 554
08 25 08 65 65 (0,15€/Min)
01805 - 121213 (€ 0,12/Min)
06 40 985 985
199 153 153
02 261 03 710
0900 20 200 88 (€ 0.10/Min)
231 627 22
0 801 801 881
80 8 200 128
0850 123 989
902 10 11 30
08 585 367 87
0870 242 0303
8-800-200-0400
8-800-502-0000
1300 362 603
800-810-5858, 010- 6475 1880
2862 6001
3030 8282
1800 1100 11
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/ur
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com.cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
ENGLISH
THIS DVD CAMCORDER IS MANUFACTURED BY:
RoHS compliant
Our product complies with “The Restriction Of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment”,
and we do not use the 6 hazardous materials- Cadmium(Cd),
Lead (Pb), Mercury (Hg), Hexavalent Chromium (Cr+6), Poly Brominated
Biphenyls (PBBs), Poly Brominated Diphenyl Ethers(PBDEs)- in our
products.
臺 灣
本 DVD 攝錄放影機的製造商:
符合 RoHS 標準
我們的產品符合「在電子與電氣設備中使用有害化學物質之管制條例」
標準,產品中絕對不含下列 6 種有害化學物質:
鎘(Cd)、鉛(Pb)、水銀(Hg)、六價鉻(Cr+6)、多溴聯苯類
(PBBs)、以及多溴聯苯醚類(PBDEs)。